JP2021007591A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To achieve a performance with enhanced interest and increase game entertainment.SOLUTION: A character selection screen H1 is displayed on a display screen 7a in an ending performance when a big winning game is completed, and a player can select a desired character from a plurality of types of characters displayed on the selection screen H1. Regarding variation display of a special symbol which is executed after the completion of the big winning game (after the ending performance is completed), a notice performance (selected character corresponding notice performance) of a mode corresponding to the character selected on the character selection screen H1 may be executed. Thereby, the notice performance reflecting the result of selection by the player can be achieved and amusement of the notice performance can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, there has been known a game machine capable of performing a special game capable of giving a predetermined game profit to a player based on a variable display of identification information and the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. There is. In this type of gaming machine, various effects for increasing the expectation of the player are performed during the variable display of the identification information (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2009-95470

However, although the production content (for example, motifs and characters that appear) differs depending on the model, the production method (for example, development and pattern of the production) does not change so much in the production performed by the conventional game machine. It tends to be unified, and there is room for further improvement in order to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a highly tasteful production and improve the game entertainment.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention has adopted the following configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of means 1
It is a gaming machine that can perform a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player based on a variable display of the identification information and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
Selective reception means that allows the player to select and display multiple types of production information and accept the selection of production information.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be a specific display result.
The gist of the suggestion effect execution means is that the suggestion effect can be executed in a manner corresponding to the effect information received by the selection reception means.

According to the above invention, it is possible to realize a highly tasteful production and improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state A which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the effect pattern (chance eye effect pattern) of the chance eye effect which concerns on Example 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the chance eye effect of the state A which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the character selection process which concerns on Example 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the character selection screen and the resident character determination screen which concerns on Example 2, (a) is a character selection screen, (b) is a resident character determination screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state B which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the chance eye effect of the state B which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect symbol game effect of the state C which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a table which shows the correspondence between the game state and the ending period which concerns on Example 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 1st ending effect which concerns on Example 3, (a) is a character selection screen, (b) is a character selection reception screen. It is a table which shows the correspondence of a character which concerns on Example 3 and a notice effect pattern. It is a flowchart of the notice effect setting process which concerns on Example 3. FIG. It is the selection character correspondence notice effect decision table which concerns on Example 3, (a) is the decision table for the change notice, and (b) is the decision table for the hold look-ahead notice.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted in the game machine frame 50, and the game board 2 is a game machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching the game ball with a launch intensity according to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 has a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by a player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (These two effect buttons are collectively referred to simply as "effect button 63" or "input means"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. Good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 to be described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information on game machine settings (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, the same information is displayed by any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, the configuration is such that it can rotate a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. It is a configuration to prevent damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) of the game machine 1. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit"). ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether or not the special symbol is correct or not. The judgment probability (first special symbol hit / fail judgment and second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is set (more than twice) (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball is launched into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the start port (second start port 21 or third start port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the game ball is launched into the left game area 3A (first game area) and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. Has been done. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are configured to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment". Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol winning / failing determination is also referred to as a "winning / failing determination executing means" or a "first winning / failing determination executing means".

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the production symbol is stopped with the same three-digit doublet (also called "big hit symbol") such as "777". indicate. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol for small hits such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. In addition, when a small hit occurs, the symbol for the small hit may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the same aspect may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different design ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. See and grasp the effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b. Further, as the execution mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc., a mode of performing the effect display using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and a mode of performing the effect display or the first effect symbol display unit. In addition to 7b, one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a (display screen 71a) and the third effect symbol display unit 72a (display screen 72a) are used to display the effect. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect using the above-mentioned effect symbol (effect symbol game effect), it is executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game production (big hit game production, small hit game production) and the demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later, and There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol (effect symbol) depending on the game state) is displayed. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. (Operates in an operating mode), the movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the first hit / fail judgment) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (normal drawing start port, pass port, ball entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as "normal symbol hit / fail judgment" or "third hit / fail judgment"), the normal symbol starts to change and display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment. Stop display. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / fail determination of whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / fail determination executing means". It is also referred to as a "third hit / miss determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (“big hit”). It is also called "executable state" or "big hit standby state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts, and the predetermined jackpot (a predetermined jackpot) The round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3, the game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29) is a first having a first large winning opening 30. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first prize-winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. Further, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entry port) capable of constantly entering a ball, it becomes a big hit in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When executed in the game, the game ball can be entered (held) into the third start port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the accuracy of the first special symbol is determined (first). (1) Special symbol hit / miss determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, the movable member 23 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular (long plate shape) upper surface as in the opening / closing member 32, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down when the ball is closed (when closed) is allowed to flow down in an arbitrary direction by the inclined upper surface passage (second large winning opening 35 described later). Induce to.

In this way, in a state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / fail determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Therefore, in the state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played (right-handed game), the game state (state B: low accuracy high) in which the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol. It has a base state (high accuracy and high base state) and a game state (state C: high accuracy and low base state) in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second starting port 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 opens and closes the second prize-winning opening 35. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second special winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, in the second large winning device 36 (second variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) general ball entrances 27 are provided. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly in which the ball enters the first starting port 20 by left-handed (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the entry into the first starting port 20, the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy, high base state, high accuracy). In the high base state or high accuracy low base state), right-handed to enter the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35. It will be a game aiming at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, first, the big hit standby state is set, and the right-handed game is aimed at entering the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit standby state, the big hit game starts, and the right-handed game mainly aims at entering the first big winning opening 30.

Further, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state (state B), it mainly goes to the gate 28 (normal figure gate) and the second starting port 21. It will be a right-handed game aiming at entering the ball. On the other hand, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends is the high accuracy low base state (state C), the right-handed game aiming at entering the third start opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. That is, the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 by right-handed (first special symbol hit / miss judgment), and the high-accuracy The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail determination) by right-handed hitting. As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of the special symbol winning / failing determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and the game ball flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 of the right game area 3B. The amount can be adjusted (decreased). That is, the second out port 34b is installed on the upstream side of all the ball entry ports installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b allow the ball entry ports to be opened. The rate of entry of game balls into the installation area (ratio of entry) can be adjusted. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second large winning opening 35, which is a large winning opening for small hits. Is provided. With this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of the game ball into the game area on the side of the second large winning opening 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entry of the ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. It is adjustable. The game nails provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c make it possible to adjust the ball entry rate (entry rate) of the game ball into the second major winning opening 35.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, and the general entering opening 27, each entry opening is used. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) in. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 has a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a game ball launch direction, that is, right. A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the ball should be hit or left. Further, the main display 40 includes a variable state indicator 49 indicating a variable state (c1) of the first special symbol, a variable state (c2) of the second special symbol, and a variable state (c3) of the normal symbol. There is. The various indicators included in these main indicators 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop is displayed to display the first start port 20 and the second start port. Notify the result of the hit / fail judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 or the third starting port 26. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and / or second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is the 15R first big hit, the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined in a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light flows repeatedly to the light.

As described above, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 41a A plurality of LEDs corresponding to are lit (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is displayed by the jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), Small hit type (1 mode if 1 type) and off type (1 mode if 1 type) are stopped and displayed.

Further, the fluctuation state display 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3), and the display unit c1 indicates the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit. The fluctuating state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the fluctuating state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display unit c1 indicating the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the first special symbol display 41a. Has been done. Then, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variable time of the first special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and the stop is displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the stop is displayed in red regardless of the big hit type. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c1 is displayed in blinking during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is displayed in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is displayed in red when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and is stopped in the off symbol. Is turned off (hidden). Thereby, by looking at the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the first special symbol display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c1) functions as a second first special symbol display 41a. Note that "interruption of variable display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) executed at the same time is a big hit, and the variable display is temporarily interrupted. Then, after the cancellation condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

Further, the display unit c2 indicating the fluctuation state of the second special symbol is, like the display unit c1, one LED (display unit, display) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display) than the second special symbol display 41b. It is composed of a display unit). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Specifically, if it is off, it will be turned off and stopped, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed in red regardless of the big hit type, and if it is a small hit, it will be turned on in green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Stop display with. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c2 is displayed blinking during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and is stopped by the small hit symbol. The inside is lit in green, and the off symbol is turned off (hidden) while it is stopped. Thereby, by looking at the display unit c2 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (changing, interrupting, stopping, hit / fail determination result) of the second special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the second special symbol display 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display 41b.

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c1 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or a "first sub-symbol". Further, since the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or a "second sub symbol". Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the second special symbol. Variable display and stop display are displayed. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the first state symbol is turned off (off mode) and stopped and displayed, and in the case of a big hit, all are lit in red regardless of the big hit type (big hit mode). Stop display with. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is also the same.

Further, the display unit c3 indicating the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is a single LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the normal symbol display 42, similarly to the display unit c1. It is configured. Then, during the variable display of the normal symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, if it is off, it is turned off and stopped, and if it is hit, it is turned on in red regardless of the hit type. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c3 is displayed blinking while the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red when the hit symbol is stopped, and is turned off when the off symbol is stopped. (Hidden). As a result, by looking at the display unit c3 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the normal symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the normal symbol display 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type in detail, but the variable state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

The display mode (design) displayed on the display unit c3 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state normal symbol" or a "first sub-normal symbol". In addition, the first state normal symbol displays fluctuation and stop corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is wrong, the light is turned off (the hit mode) and the stop is displayed, and if the hit is the hit type, the red light is turned on (the hit mode).

In this embodiment, a special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and a variable state display 49 are provided, and the variable state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. , When any LED of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs capable of grasping the fluctuation state in detail fails (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable state display 49. Further, in the present embodiment, the display control of both the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and the variable state display 49 is performed by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes of the special symbol and the effect symbol (display result of the variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "off mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as a "big hit mode" or a "big hit symbol", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit. This is also called a "small hit mode" or a "small hit symbol". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various types of special symbol hit / fail determination random numbers and the like are based on the entry. Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special figure hold (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is stored in the unit 85a and acquired based on the entry into the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). Will be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol hit / fail judgments, the special symbol hit / fail judgment for the entry is made up to a predetermined number (4 each). It is possible to reserve (hold) the right of.

Then, the number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds 1 to 1 No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol winning / failing determination, a normal symbol winning / failing determination, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as "game control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and signals are output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the third start port sensor 26a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second The large winning opening sensor 35a and the general entry opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first grand prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first grand prize device 31. The second grand prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second grand prize device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, variable state indicator 49, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives and pays out prize balls and pays out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is used as the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let them control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which variable display and stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the same number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. To.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. is there. Even when such a covering state is reached, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, and the like can be surely confirmed. In addition, a fourth effect hold indicator 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, and the fourth effect hold display 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c that detect that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. The jackpot symbol (specific display result) is predetermined according to the type of jackpot described later (see FIG. 6). In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15Rth". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", and "2R 7th big hits". In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 2nd big hit", "4R 3rd big hit", and "4R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. In "2R 6th big hit" and "2R 7th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 2 times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable ball opening)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" indicate the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. , Move to the high probability state described later (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to the low probability state described later (the probability variation function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time reduction". Activate "function" and do not activate high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high accuracy and low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high-accuracy low-base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than that of the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state. It is set. In particular, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

Further, the game playability in the high accuracy and low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, the third start is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged. Let the ball enter the mouth 26. Then, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, a small hit is generated, and the game ball can be increased in the period (between the big hits) between the previous big hit and the next big hit. In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during the big hits, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is an advantageous period for the player, and it is a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is shorter than that when the first special symbol time reduction function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the change display of the special symbol ends based on the execution of 100 times, the game state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

In addition, the "4R 3rd jackpot" and the "2R 6th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd big hit" and "2R 6th big hit", after the big hit game is completed, the high accuracy high base state (first special symbol time saving state) is set until the next big hit occurs.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made, and the game is expected to occur in the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is a period to be performed, and as described above, many game balls are played in a short period of time by making small hits frequently while executing the second special symbol hit / fail judgment by right-handed games. It is a favorable period for the player, who can also expect to acquire. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (4R 3rd big hit game) related to "4R 3rd big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (4R 4th big hit game) related to "4R 4th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to non-notification states that do not notify the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) (make it difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "4R 3rd jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "4R 4th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the game interest. In the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy high-base state, that is, in the high-base state, the player does not reduce the number of balls held so much (when the rate of decrease of the balls held is slower than in the low-accuracy low-base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, after the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot" is completed, the high accuracy and high base state and after the jackpot game (2R 7th jackpot game) related to "2R 7th jackpot" are completed. By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. To do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to non-notification states that do not notify the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) (make it difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the game interest.

Here, the jackpots of "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", and "2R 7th jackpot", which are the jackpots whose game state after the end of the jackpot game is the state B, respectively. The design is also called the "first specific display result", and the game state after the end of the big hit game is the big hit "15R 1st big hit", "4R 2nd big hit" and "15R 5th big hit". Each of the big hit symbols is also called "second specific display result".

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, and one time (and) compared to other big hits. The opening time of (total) is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed 6 times for 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller than that of the big hit game (for example, 15R first big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.). However, in the high-accuracy low-base state between large hits, by generating small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the game state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and the 4R first jackpot. The 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R fifth jackpot, 15% for the 2R sixth jackpot, and 35% for the 2R seventh jackpot. That is, if a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) in which the fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R 5th big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed by entering the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is not a big hit. 3 It is highly possible that a big hit is advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the starting port 26. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is a "variable pattern random number (also referred to as" variable pattern information ")". Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port 21 is in the operating state or not. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of operating states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/315). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged to be a big hit is large. A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is called a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the variation time shortening function is operating is referred to as "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. State A (low accuracy low base state) and state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state in which the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, a state mainly in determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player performs a right-handed game and puts the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is executed. Is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for the big hit, 1000 seconds for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Since the base is low (first game state), it is impossible or difficult to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game is advanced in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable state in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in the state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), since the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is operating, the right-handed game is performed. As a result, it is possible to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26 which have been opened. In the state B, as in the state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not operating. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variable time of the second special symbol is a very long time. Since it is set to (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit, 1000 seconds for small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, by operating the first special symbol time saving function, the first special symbol time saving state is set, and the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed more frequently than the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, it has a state C (high accuracy and low base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state mainly for determining whether or not the second special symbol is correct. In state C (high accuracy and low base state), since the second special symbol time saving function is activated, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering the third starting port 26 by performing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the operation of the second special symbol time saving function sets the second special symbol time saving state, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed more frequently than the states A and B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to execute the second special symbol winning / failing determination, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol winning / failing determination.

In the state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the first special symbol is displayed. Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even if the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a hold memory related to the first special symbol winning / failing determination, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is performed. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed.

As described above, although the state B and the state C are both states in which the right-handed game is performed, in the state B, as in the state C, the game state is set in which the first special symbol winning / failing determination is mainly performed, and the state C Then, it is regarded as a game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed. As a result, it becomes a big hit in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, and in the so-called consecutive villa period (right-handed state) after shifting to the right-handed game, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. The game is diversified by shifting between the game state in which the game is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed. In addition, since the game state in which the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed have different types of jackpots (big hit games) that can occur, right-handed strikes. During the continuation of the game, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of these game states. This makes it possible to prevent the game from getting bored and enhance the game's interest.

Further, when the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game smoothly without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (second special symbol hit / fail judgment, first). 2 It is possible to execute a special symbol variable game). Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is not activated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the normal state). However, the first special symbol time saving function may be activated. Further, in the state B, the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased, and in the state C, it is increased.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (first special symbol time saving function or second special symbol time saving function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C) for the state B. Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (determination of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the period of operation. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, so that these functions are not activated in the low base state. , The period in which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of opening times is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the game rapid flow or speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibitory member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. As a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state (ball entry possible state), the flowing game ball enters the second starting opening 21 and the second ball is entered. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35. In addition, the third out opening 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the second large winning opening 35 from entering the second large winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, so that the player selects the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner without being displayed in a variable manner. That is, there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game even in the normal state (low accuracy and low base state). However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Because it is set to, even if the 2nd special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state (even if the ball is entered into the 3rd starting port 26), the variable display cannot be performed many times, and the game efficiency is very high. It's a bad thing. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner by the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner by the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, the frequency with which the second starting port 21 is opened is improved, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is increased by the first special symbol time saving function. Is shortened, and the game efficiency of right-handed games is improved. In such a case, it is more advantageous to perform the right-handed game and perform the first special symbol winning / failing determination than to perform the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the second special symbol time saving function shortens the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the game efficiency by the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and the ball is executed based on the entry into the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol changes for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 420/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the ball enters the second starting port 21 by frequently causing the ball to enter the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game. Aim for the next big hit by the first special symbol hit / fail judgment without greatly reducing the number of balls held. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the ball entry rate of the game ball into the second start port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 by the right-handed game, and the accuracy is high. While aiming to increase the number of balls held in the small hit game during the low base state, the next big hit is aimed at by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform small hit games), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening. The two starting openings 21 and the second winning openings 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is closed, about 90% of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B are , Passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30, then flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second winning opening 35. It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 and flow down to the out port 34. Then, if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and the entered game ball is placed in the game area downstream of the winning opening. It has a structure that is not available. Further, the remaining 10% that does not flow into the gate 28 side enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the right-handed game balls can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, no small hit, and a 62/63 probability of a loss.

First, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21 and the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching in front of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the third starting port 21 without flowing down to the second starting port 21. Enter the ball at 26 or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously (highly frequently) executed. Since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease speed of the ball held is reduced, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the next big hit is made. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the game to the right is smoothly entered into the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball can be opened, the game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first, and does not enter the second start port 21. A situation occurs in which only the ball enters the second prize opening 30.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and the game will be less enjoyable. Therefore, as in this embodiment, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 21 when not during the big hit game. Absent.

Next, the high accuracy and low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, a determination as to whether or not the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also lower than that in the high base state. Since it is set to (1/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. It becomes a state. Since the probability of hitting is set to 1/240, it is almost possible that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state. In addition, instead of such an aspect, the probability of winning in the normal symbol hit / fail judgment in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all the results may be out of order. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be opened in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

That is, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 is set to the second starting port 21. The possibility of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit varies regardless of whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit.

The game ball that flows down the downstream of the first winning opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is branched into a third starting port 26 side passage and a second starting port 21 side passage by a branching portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the third starting port 26 enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, it is unlikely that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, so that the game ball flowing into the passage on the second starting port 21 side is almost the same. All of them flow down to the second big winning opening 35 and the third out opening 34c provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 , It is opened in the opening / closing mode for small hits shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 and flows down to the second large winning opening 35, and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big winning opening 35 which is.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, since the high-accuracy low-base state continues at least until the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the player can increase the number of balls held as the high-accuracy low-base state continues for a long period of time. It will be possible. In the high accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol time is shortened and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (first special symbol long time state). The execution frequency of is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 times). In addition, as a result, the winning balls of the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls of the big hit game as the total winning balls of the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of these) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time for opening state, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of hit / fail judgment of normal symbol), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first step is made. 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and high base state where the small hit game can occur, the second starting port 21 is configured so as to be hardly opened (may be configured not to be opened at all). It is difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the second large winning opening 35 when the game occurs by entering the ball into the second starting opening 21. Therefore, a third out port 34c is provided between the second starting port 21 and the second big winning opening 35, and the ball entry rate to the third out opening 34c can be adjusted to make the second big winning. The ball entry rate to the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

Further, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to substantially maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or suppress the speed of the holding ball decrease). (While), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a small ball is inserted into the third starting port 26. A state in which the player plays with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning opening 35 when a hit occurs (high accuracy and low). (Base state) and, and diversify the playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) and a high accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the interest of games.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being hindered by the second starting port 21 or the like, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the first gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide the 2 starting port 21, the 3rd starting port 26, and the 2nd big winning opening 35 upstream.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left-handed game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Also, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like in each process described below. To do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, third start port sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. , The first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) reads the detection signal and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal symbol operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the normal symbol random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Judgment (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S306). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is acquired. Perform processing (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the third start opening 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, specifically, the main control). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311). Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing when starting the ball]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry process (S205) after the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ") Is equivalent to.

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, what type of big hit is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, when the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not sent to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible to set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special figure 1 start-in ball command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), processing during normal symbol fluctuation (S404), and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the values (0) to “238”), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), a normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the process during normal symbol variation (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the ordinary symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are open for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If S1002 determines that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for each normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for normal figure is set (S1009). S1010), finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), Special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is performed, and if "Special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved spheres in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not Special Figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved spheres in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, there is one or more memorized random number counter values acquired based on the entry of spheres into the first starting port 20 (in S1201). NO), special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowest region of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the deviations (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit by the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), any one of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit is executed. .. If the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, either the 15R 5th big hit, the 2R 6th big hit, or the 2R 7th big hit is executed (Fig. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit judgment (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the above is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is displayed. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of the fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out table (state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of holds The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1708). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot table (in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit is stored) Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low accuracy high base state, it shifts to a low accuracy low base state (normal state). In the high accuracy and high base state, "10000" is set in the state B counter, so that the value of the state B counter is substantially "0" even if the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation. Absent. That is, the high accuracy and high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the fluctuation display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

A special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), and then the special figure 1 is specified. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to Special FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the variation time in Special Figure 1 is interrupted (S2904), and the processing is completed. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first The special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round) Set "15" to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times (from opening to closing of the big winning opening in one round) (S2005), and set the big hit opening command to start the big hit game (S2006). ), Set the operation status of Special Figure 1 to "4" (S2007), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so set "4" to the value of the round counter (S2008) and move to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2009), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. 21 to 29 (S211) Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / miss). It is more likely to be a jackpot with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the judgment) (Fig. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (the first large prize device 31 and the second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) is performed, and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is performed, and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment enables the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol are executed. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. Judge whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Further, in the state C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) of the second special symbol than fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (which can execute various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol is lowered. On the other hand, in the state A and the state B, the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol (the first special symbol hit / miss determination). Therefore, in the states A and B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (fluctuation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and various time (various game effects) can be produced. The variable pattern (which can be executed) can be selected. Therefore, in the states A and B, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types). Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered.

Further, since the states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is disabled and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. It has been set for a long time. Specifically, when the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed in the states A and B, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. (P12 or P20). This is set to a fluctuation time shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit in the state A. Further, in the state B, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the states A and B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not the main hit / fail judgment, but if an excessively long fluctuation time is set, the player who made the hit / fail judgment himself / herself executes the jackpot game related to the jackpot. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, if a big hit occurs as a result of the hit / fail judgment, the fluctuation time (the longest one) set in the main first special symbol is not set unnecessarily for a long time. Set a shorter fluctuation time. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the player is set a variable time in which the player can wait, and the player is inflicted with a disadvantage that the profit from the big hit that he has earned cannot be obtained. Absent. In addition, since it is unlikely that a big hit will occur and the profit that can be obtained is large, such control is used.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a fluctuation time that is even longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. Of the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is set to a longer fluctuation display time than when it is a big hit or a miss. Set.

Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol winning / failing determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the winning / failing determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently by executing the second special symbol winning / failing determination. In addition, if there is a situation in which small hits can occur frequently, a malicious player executes the second special symbol hit / fail judgment even though the game state is mainly based on the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. There is a risk that a small hit will result in a game profit. For example, in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed, there is a risk that a game profit may be unreasonably obtained due to an inappropriate game such as performing a right-handed game. In order to prevent such a situation, in states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment that is not the main body is a small hit, the fluctuation time is set to a long time (the longest time). It prevents small hits (small hit games) from occurring frequently. Further, since the game profit that can be obtained by one small hit game is not so large, it does not cause much damage to the player who generated the small hit.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination is wrong, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a fluctuation time that is even longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. In addition, the variation display time of the second special symbol that is not the main body in the states A and B is shorter than when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and longer than when it is a big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and the left-handed game should be performed. , Prevent the player from playing an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game. In addition, as another aspect, the jackpot and the miss may have the same fluctuation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds, and both may be 600 seconds).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is processed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is turned ON when the player launches the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the jackpot standby state and passes the game ball through the start gate 29. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, if the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the game machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the jackpot winning device (first jackpot winning device 31) has been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it the time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), and S2154 Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the gate has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the game machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the jackpot game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot, 2R 6th jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots, and in S2201, the jackpot games are these. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot. Determine if it exists (S2203).

When it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 10,000 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. It is not possible to execute the variable display of the special symbol 10,000 times during the business hours of the game store in a day. Therefore, by setting "10000" in the status B counter, the next big hit is substantially generated. It means that the high base state (state B) is continued until. In addition, instead of the control for setting the number of times such as "10000" times in the state B, the control for maintaining the high base state (state) until the next big hit may occur.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is neither the 4R 3rd jackpot nor the 2R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the completed jackpot game is the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, Or, if it is determined that it is one of the 15R 5th jackpots (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag turned off. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the status B counter is set. Set "100" (S2207) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state of 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the low accuracy high base state is obtained.

The game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) that executes the game state setting process (S2121) functions as a “game state control means”.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether or not the time of the interval between the multiple opening has elapsed and the time to start the next opening operation has been reached (S2303). .. Regarding the small hit game, regardless of the passage of the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when S2303 determines that it is time to open the large winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second large winning opening 35 is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of the game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big winning opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second major winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The opening counter for small hits becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). If it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315) and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the game's interest. It should be noted that the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the game machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is in a winning game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. It has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (the first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second information") is a big hit. A high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given) based on a symbol (also referred to as a "specific display mode"), and a high-probability state (a privilege) is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is supposed to end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power supply cutoff monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power supply cutoff signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction design game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from speakers, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Judge (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the process shifts to the S4403 process, and the effect hold information storage process (S4402) is performed to shift to the S4403 process. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start entry command (special figure 1 start entry command or special figure 2 start entry command) received by S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation patterns random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (YES) described later ( S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big winning opening command sent based on the entry into 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry into the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set the round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is the ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening ball command), the big winning opening specified based on the command (1st big winning) A ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variation effect start process (S4404), first, the effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as the variation effect determination random number, the advance notice effect determination random number, and the effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The result, symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the low accuracy and low base state is controlled, the effect modes C and D are executed when the high accuracy and low base state is controlled, and the effect mode E Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the production is not executed (reach no production design game production), etc. are determined. In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). When the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols (same effect symbol) constituting the jackpot mode. ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show by the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is out of the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, and if there is a reach, there are three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect (notice effect pattern) to be executed along with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including this execution notice production. This notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped or displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect (preliminary effect pattern) matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected. , Set this (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable production start process is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect pattern game effect (variable effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variable effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

As a general rule, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is a vertically scrolled display of the symbols in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (ascending order). (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the variation effect pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide the mode as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. However, in the present embodiment, the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effects symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → Stop mode in which the middle symbol → right symbol (also referred to as “first stop mode”) and (2) Stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“1st stop mode”) (Also referred to as "second stop mode") and (3) stop mode (also referred to as "third stop mode") in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the change effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variation display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small” mainly in the effect mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the above, (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”) based on the above, and (3) effect mode C (3) In the state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation or the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "big hit", the variation display is performed. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the condition (1) in the production modes A and B (state A) that the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls of the special figure works (at the start of fluctuation). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and based on this, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation. , (2) In the effect mode E (state B), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", and (3) ) In the effect mode C (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", the variation display is stopped. This is a feasible stop mode.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" mainly in the effect mode C (state C). Based on this, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation based on the above.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variation display of the effect symbol 8 are provided according to the effect mode (game state), the variation display mode based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, and the result (stop display mode). Therefore, it is possible to make the stopping mode different and diversified according to the situation of the game. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, and the like through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stopping mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol-> left symbol-> middle symbol" (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped at substantially the same stop time and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be variously defined.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the symbol classification (group) is defined by the color. The classification of this symbol is different depending on the game state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), among the symbols "1" to "9", "3" and "7" are designated as red symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbols"), and "1". , "5", "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and "2", "4", "6", "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "blue symbols"). It says). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), "3", "5" and "7" among the symbols "1" to "9" are red symbols, and "1" and "4" are used. , "9" are green symbols, and even-numbered symbols "2", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt a correspondence relationship other than this, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment, and other colors are used. Can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the classification of the symbols (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by the elements other than the color. For example, the type of character (friendly character, enemy character, etc.) when a character is attached to the effect symbol, the effect symbol representing a number (number symbol), and the effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character. ) May be determined by the number symbol and the character symbol, and further, the symbol classification may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variation display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. There is.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the loose stitches is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls that the player can acquire (the number of prize balls won) is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase the number of balls held) in a small hit game than (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount). Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as the small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the loose stitches, the "specific loose stitch" described later is set as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific disparity) is also referred to as a "first display mode", and the big hit mode (doublet) is also referred to as a "second display mode", and the disengagement mode (complete disparity, reach disparity). Of the (eyes), the reach-separated number is also referred to as a "third display mode", and among the out-of-order modes (completely disjointed eyes, reach disjointed eyes), the completely disjointed eye is also referred to as a "fourth display mode".

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first) based mainly on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. 1) The change display of the special symbol) is performed, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the second special symbol) is rarely performed during the change display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation is caused by the effect display 102. Only display (and stop display) is to be performed. Similarly, the state B (high base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special) mainly based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. (Fluctuating display of symbols) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail determination is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display) only.

Similarly, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment mainly based on the entry into the third starting port 26 ( (Variation display of the second special symbol) is performed, and since it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol, this is performed. When the first special symbol hit / fail determination is made under such a situation, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display 102 is used. Only variable display (and stop display) is to be performed.

However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. (When a big hit is made), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect suggesting the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. When the game state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state by changing to such a big hit type, or in addition to such a big hit type, a predetermined number of times in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the variation display of the special symbol (50 or 100) is completed, a jackpot type may be provided in which the gaming state changes to the high accuracy and low base state. By providing such a big hit type, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high base state, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, it depends on the big hit type thereafter. There are a case where the gaming state shifts to the low probability low base state, a case where the high accuracy high base state is continued, and a case where the game state shifts to the high accuracy low base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the changing mode (transition mode) of the gaming state, enhance the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times, the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state to shift to after the execution of. As a result, the player's playing interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for an advantageous state is increased. Further, as a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, the game state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game in anticipation of. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment for a long period of time.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (variable state display 49 c1 and c2). ) Are all displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of this mode, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation). The display control of c1 and c2) of the status display 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub control unit. As a result, even if a problem occurs in the display control of one control unit, if the display control of the other control is appropriate, it is possible to notify the correct game information. Further, both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display shall be provided on the same display unit (main display 40). As a result, a first special symbol display controlled by the main control unit and a second special symbol display controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity, and the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control is performed. It is possible to easily confirm that there is no problem with.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, the display control of both the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is performed by the main control unit. I decided to do it. In this mode, the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. As a result, the same effect as that of the special symbol display described above is obtained.

Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second ordinary symbol display, a second first special symbol hold indicator, a second second special symbol hold indicator, and a second normal figure (not shown) are shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) are mainly controlled. The display is controlled by the unit, and the second special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator, second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are controlled by other control units such as the sub-control unit. It may be controlled by. In addition, these, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), the first The special figure holding indicator (2nd 1st special figure holding indicator, 2nd special figure holding indicator) and 2nd normal drawing holding indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the two, easily confirm the consistency of the displayed contents, and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control.

In addition, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), the first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), and the first special symbol hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b), 1st normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), 2nd special symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second ordinary symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49 c3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. Further, the main display 40 can be provided on the outside (outside) of the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 on the outside (outside) of the game area 3.

In addition, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the display is controlled by the main control unit when the power is supplied again. Special symbol display (1st special symbol display 41a and 2nd special symbol display 41b), 1st normal symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), 1st special symbol hold indicator (1st special) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) first execute the display (display control) (restart and return). , The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second special figure whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator later execute (restart, return) display (display control). ..

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second feature whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The figure hold indicator (the second first special figure hold indicator, the second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. The display (display control) is executed (restarted and restored) before (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / or the third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display lights, turns off, and blinks a single LED, respectively, while the image display devices (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or the first This is because the 3 image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display unit and has more complicated display control than the main display device.

As a result, even if the display unit shows the special symbol hit / miss judgment result or the fluctuation state controlled by the same sub-control unit, the first sub-display unit that quickly returns the display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored). And a second sub-display unit that returns the display with a delay after that. Then, depending on each role, it becomes possible to execute the optimum game control. The first sub-display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (variable state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator are applicable and simple. With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display unit corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. However, with complicated display control, various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) can be displayed, and it is possible to improve the taste by various game effects.

Further, in still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the sub-control unit will supply power again. A second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), a second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and a second special symbol hold display (second) whose display is controlled. 2 1st special figure holding display, 2nd 2nd special figure holding display), 2nd normal figure holding display first executes (restarts, returns) display (display control), and the main control unit First special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), first special symbol whose display is controlled by The hold display (first special figure hold display 43a, second special figure hold display 43b) and the first normal figure hold display (normal figure hold display 42) later execute (restart) display (display control). , The image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit is further displayed (display control). ) May be executed (restart, return).

Next, Example 2 of the present invention will be described. The second embodiment shows one embodiment of the effect that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment and the configuration related to the effect control. In the following, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted. Further, in the following, different codes and step numbers from those of the first embodiment will be used for configurations different from those of the first embodiment, and the same codes and step numbers and the like will be used for common configurations.

The various effects described in the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later are control processes (received command analysis processes) performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) as described in the first embodiment. (S4302), variable effect start process (S4404), hit game effect process (S4408), etc.). Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) is also referred to as an “effect execution means” or a “effect control means”. Further, in the following, in the above-described first embodiment, the low probability low base state (state A) is also referred to as a "first game state", and the high base state (low probability high base state and high probability high base state). That is, the state B) is also referred to as a "second game state", and the low probability high base state (state B) is also referred to as a "low probability and second game state", and the high probability high base state (state B). This is also referred to as "high probability and second gaming state". Further, the high-accuracy low-base state (state C) is also referred to as a "third game state" or a "small hit frequent occurrence state".

[Game production in state A]
The game effect executed in the state A, which is the low probability low base state (normal game state), is mainly based on the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. , The effect symbol game effect (variable effect) executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. As described above, in the state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect of the state A is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the second embodiment, the setting and transition of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) according to the predetermined mode control conditions. There is. Therefore, the player cannot be involved in the setting (transition) of the effect mode in the state A. Note that, for example, the player may operate the effect button 63 or the like during the demo effect so that the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode in the state A.

In the state A (effect mode A or B), as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "5" consisting of green symbols are used. , "9" and "3" and "7" consisting of red symbols are displayed. The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed.

Under such an effect mode and a symbol, as shown in FIG. 53, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 53 (a)), the variation display is basically a second stop mode (see FIG. 53 (a)). It is stopped at the left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol (see Fig. 53 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)), and the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 When is working (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 53 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (directed symbol 8L) and the right symbol (directed symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 53 (f)), and then the middle symbol (directed symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. Until it is stopped, the reach effect is executed on the image display device or the like. In the reach effect, an effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (whether or not the jackpot mode is displayed) is mainly developed. The same applies to the states B and C with respect to the establishment of reach and the effect of reach.

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in different stitches (completely loose stitches or reach loose stitches) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Is switched to the jackpot game effect (15R jackpot game effect or 4R jackpot game effect) for the jackpot related to the first special symbol. Then, when the big hit game is based on "15R 1st big hit" or "4R 2nd big hit", the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high probability low base state (state C, 2nd game state), and " In the case of "4R 3rd big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability high base state (state B, high probability and 2nd game state), and in the case of "4R 4th big hit", that The game state after the jackpot game ends is the low probability high base state (state B, low probability and second game state) (see FIG. 6).

Further, in the state A, the chance eye effect can be executed as the advance notice effect (special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice) based on the result of the preliminary determination (S322) of the first special figure hold. Hereinafter, the chance eye effect executed in the state A will be described. The chance eye is a kind of stop display mode (including temporary stop) of the effect symbol 8, and is a stop display (temporary stop display or fixed stop) without reaching reach among the out-of-order modes (non-specific modes). It refers to a specific stop roll that is displayed). The effect of stopping and displaying this specific stop roll (chance eye) is called "chance eye effect". Further, the chance eye is also called a "special mode", and the chance eye production is also called a "special stop production". Further, in the following description, when the term "stop display" is simply used, it can be understood in either sense without distinguishing between the temporary stop display and the fixed stop display.

[Proposal of chance eyes in state A]
In the state A, when all three symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) constituting the effect symbol 8 are stopped and displayed with the same color (same classification), the stop roll (same color roll) is used as the chance eye. There is. Specifically, the red pattern ("3, 3.7", "3, 7, 7", "7, 3, 3", etc.) and the green pattern ("1, 5, 9") , "1 ・ 5 ・ 5", "5 ・ 9 ・ 1" etc.) and the blue pattern ("2 ・ 4 ・ 6", "4 ・ 6 ・ 8", "4 ・ 6 ・ 6" etc. ) Is defined as the chance eye of state A. Of these chance eyes, the chance eye composed of the red symbol is also called the "red chance eye", and the chance eye composed of the green symbol is also called the "green chance eye", and is composed of the blue symbol. The chance eye is also called "blue chance eye".

In the chance eye effect of the state A according to this embodiment, when the "red chance eye" appears, the first special figure hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is "15R first big hit" and "4R second big hit". , "4R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot", the appearance rate of the chance eye is set so that the possibility of holding the jackpot (big hit reliability) is the highest. It is stipulated that the jackpot reliability decreases in the order of "eyes" and "blue chance eyes". In other words, the relationship between the jackpot reliability of each chance is "blue chance" <"green chance" <"red chance".

In this embodiment, the chance eyes that may be stopped and displayed in the state A are configured by "combination of symbols of the same color", but the configuration of the chance eyes is not limited to this, for example. When a character is attached to the effect pattern, chance eyes (all ally characters, etc.) can be configured according to the type of the character (friend character, enemy character, etc.).

The chance eye effect of the state A is executed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. Specifically, it corresponds to (1) that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is deviated and executed based on the fluctuation pattern "P7" (see FIG. 9), and (2) the number of reserved balls "2" in the special figure 1. Corresponds to the number of balls held in Special Figure 1 "1" under the condition that the hold held (also referred to as "specific hold") that triggers the execution of the fluctuation display based on the deviation pattern "P4" is stored as the hold in Special Figure 1. The special figure 1 fluctuation due to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold is executed based on the deviation pattern "P7" (see FIG. 9), and (3) the first special figure 1 corresponding to the number of reserved balls "2". Under the situation where the jackpot hold is stored as the special figure hold, the change display of the first special symbol due to the digestion of the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number "1" is removed and the change pattern "P7" ( (See FIG. 9) is satisfied, and (4) the variation effect start process when starting the variation display of the first special symbol based on the deviation variation pattern "P7". When the "chance eye notice" is set as the notice effect (notice effect pattern) in (S4404), the chance eye effect is executed (S4506).

Here, in the situation where the specific out-of-order hold (out-of-order fluctuation pattern "P4") is stored, the chance eye effect is performed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern "P4" for a long time of 120 seconds (see FIG. 9). ), This is because, as the variation effect based on such a long-time variation pattern, an effect with relatively high jackpot reliability (for example, super reach effect, development effect, etc.) is executed. Further, in the situation where the jackpot hold is stored, the chance eye effect is performed for a relatively long time of 30 seconds or more in the jackpot fluctuation pattern (“P1” to “P3”) (see FIG. 9). This is because, as the variation effect based on such a long-time variation pattern, an effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability (for example, a super reach effect, a development effect, etc.) is executed. By configuring the variation effect based on the variation pattern with a long variation time to be executed after the chance eye effect, the player is focused on the opportunity eye effect and the variation effect after the chance eye effect, and the player is hit against the big hit. It is possible to fuel the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the chance eye effect is executed triggered by the fact that the specified off hold or jackpot hold is memorized (see (2) or (3) of the above execution condition), the specified off hold or jackpot hold is memorized. Since the chance eye effect is executed between the time when the change is displayed and the change display of the effect symbol 8 based on the specific off hold or the jackpot hold (the change display of the first special symbol) is performed, the chance eye effect is executed during that time. It is possible to improve the game entertainment. In addition, a production having a relatively high jackpot reliability such as a super reach production or a development production is also referred to as a "specific production" or a "specific production".

Among the execution conditions of the chance eye effect, the determination of whether or not the specific off hold or the jackpot hold is stored is determined by accessing the effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 and the stored contents (effect hold information). It is done by checking. As described above, in the effect hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means), information such as the pre-judgment result, the hit type, and the fluctuation pattern included in the start entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 is the effect hold information. The stored content (effect hold information) matches the stored content (acquired information) of the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure hold storage unit) of the main control unit 80. To do. Therefore, by checking the storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area, it is possible to determine the pre-determination result of the special figure hold that is currently stored.

Here, as described above, the effect hold information includes the special figure 1 effect hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold and the special figure 2 effect hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold, and the effect hold. The information storage area includes a special figure 1 effect hold information storage area for storing the special figure 1 effect hold information and a special figure 2 effect hold information storage area for storing the special figure 2 effect hold information. When the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub-control unit 90) checks the storage status of the special figure hold, the target of the effect hold information to be checked is the special figure 1 effect hold information or the effect hold information according to the gaming state at that time. Special figure 2 Switch to production hold information. Specifically, when the gaming state is the state A or the state B, the special figure 1 effect hold information is checked, and when the game state is C, the special figure 2 effect hold information is checked. This is because the states A and B are gaming states in which the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and the state C is the gaming state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. It should be noted that the above-mentioned specific out-of-specification hold and jackpot hold that trigger the execution of the chance-eye effect are also referred to as "specific acquisition information" and "specific acquisition information".

The chance eye effect of the state A executed under such a condition is executed by utilizing the variation effect (pseudo-ream effect) by the so-called "pseudo-ream". Pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream effect) is to temporarily stop (temporarily stop) in a stop display mode (predetermined random number) other than doublet after the effect symbol 8 is variablely displayed during one variable display of the special symbol. After that, the operation of displaying the effect symbol 8 in a variable manner is repeated a predetermined number of times. As described above, the chance eye effect is executed when the "chance eye notice" is set at the start of the variation effect related to the variation display (12-second variation) based on the deviation variation pattern "P7" (S4506). Is. That is, the chance eye effect is executed by the variation effect based on the deviation variation pattern "P7". Therefore, the variation effect based on the deviation variation pattern "P7" accompanied by the chance eye effect (chance eye notice) is executed as the "pseudo continuous effect". Therefore, the chance eye effect of the state A is also a pseudo continuous effect. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern related to the chance eye effect in the state A includes the effect symbol (stop symbol) for displaying the stop display (temporary stop and fixed stop in the pseudo-ream) as the chance eye (special mode). It is set by the processing of S4505 and S4506 of.

The production pattern of the chance eye production in the state A (also referred to as the "chance eye production pattern") is roughly divided into a pattern in which the number of times the chance eye is stopped (also referred to as the "chance eye stop count") is "2 times". It consists of a total of four types of patterns: a pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is "3 times", a pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is "4 times", and a pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is "5 times". Then, in each of these production patterns, the types of chance eyes that are stopped and displayed and their appearance order (for example, "blue chance eyes → green chance eyes", "blue chance eyes → green chance eyes → red chance eyes", etc. ) Is defined as the chance eye appearance pattern.

When executing the chance eye effect, the chance eye effect pattern that defines the pre-judgment result of the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold look-ahead result) and the selection condition (selection rate) of the chance eye effect pattern. The chance eye effect pattern (including the chance eye appearance pattern) is determined based on the determination table (not shown) and the random number for determining the advance notice effect (S4506). As mentioned above, the jackpot reliability of chance eyes is highest for "red chance eyes", followed by "green chance eyes" and "blue chance eyes", but in addition to this, The selection condition (selection rate) of the chance eye production pattern is set in the chance eye production pattern determination table so that the jackpot reliability increases as the number of chance eye stoppages increases. For example, when the first special figure hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is a big hit hold, the selection rate (appearance rate) of a pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is "4 times" or more or a pattern in which "red chance eye" appears. ) Is relatively high, and the selection condition (selection) is relatively low so that the selection rate (appearance rate) of the pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is "3 times" or less and the pattern in which "red chance eye" does not appear is relatively low. Rate) is determined. On the contrary, when the 1st special figure hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is off and is on hold, the pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is "3 times" or less or the pattern in which the "red chance eye" does not appear is selected. The rate (appearance rate) is relatively high, and the selection rate (appearance rate) of patterns in which the number of chance eye stops is "4 times" or more and patterns in which "red chance eyes" appear is relatively low. Selection conditions (selection rate) are determined.

Here, FIG. 54 shows an example of an effect pattern for the chance eye effect (chance eye effect pattern). In the figure, the chance eye production pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is “4 times” and “5 times” is illustrated. The star mark (★) in the figure indicates the jackpot reliability of each appearance pattern within the number of stops at the first chance, and the larger the number of star marks, the higher the jackpot reliability. ing. In the figure, "blue" in the chance eye appearance pattern means "blue chance eye", "green" means "green chance eye", and "red" means "red chance eye".

As shown in FIG. 54, in the chance eye effect pattern of this embodiment, as the number of chance eye stops increases, the type of chance eye (color in this example) that is stopped and displayed indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Includes things that can change to (color). For example, if the number of chance stops is "5", the first and second of the five are "blue chance", the third and fourth are "green chance", and the fifth is "red chance". (Blue chance eyes → blue chance eyes → green chance eyes → green chance eyes → red chance eyes), which includes a mode in which chance eyes rise as the number of times increases. By providing the chance eye production pattern in which the chance eye is raised in this way, the player is made to pay attention to the number of times the production symbol is stopped and displayed at the chance eye and the type of chance eye (color in this example). , It is possible to raise expectations for big hits.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54, when the number of chance eye stops is "4 times", the jackpot reliability of "blue chance eye → green chance eye → red chance eye → red chance eye" among the chance eye appearance patterns is high. It is the highest, and the jackpot reliability of "blue chance eye-> blue chance eye-> blue chance eye-> blue chance eye" is the lowest. In addition, among the chance eye stop times of "5 times", the jackpot reliability of "blue chance eye → green chance eye → green chance eye → red chance eye → red chance eye" is the highest among the chance eye appearance patterns. The jackpot reliability of "blue chance eye-> blue chance eye-> blue chance eye-> blue chance eye-> blue chance eye" is the lowest. The relationship between the number of chance eye stops, the chance eye appearance pattern, and the jackpot reliability is similarly defined for the chance eye production patterns in which the number of chance eye stops is "2 times" and "3 times". When the chance eye effect is executed, one of the chance eye effect patterns is selected by using the chance eye effect pattern determination table (not shown) (S4506).

Further, in the present embodiment, for the chance eye production based on the chance eye production pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is 4 or more, the effect suggesting how many times the chance eye is stopped and displayed (also referred to as "number suggestion effect"). Is also executed. The number-of-times suggestion effect can be said to be a preliminary effect regarding the chance-eye effect in that it suggests the number of chance-eye stops. The effect pattern of the number-of-times suggestion effect (number-of-times suggestion effect pattern) is set according to the effect pattern of the chance eye effect (S4506). The number-of-times suggestion effect of this embodiment is to be executed when the first chance stop is triggered in the chance eye effect, and after the first chance stop, how many more chances are there. It suggests whether it will be displayed as stopped. In other words, it suggests the number of remaining stop impressions for the chance. Therefore, the number-of-times suggestion effect pattern is a pattern that suggests that the number of stop display times (remaining number of times) of the chance eye is three more times, and that the number of stop display times (remaining number of times) of the chance eye is four more times. It consists of a suggestion pattern, and when the chance eye production pattern with 4 chance eye stops is set, the former number suggestion effect pattern is set, and the chance eye effect pattern with 5 chance eye stops is set. If so, the latter number suggestion effect pattern is set. In this way, the number of times suggestion effect is executed together with the chance eye effect, and the stop display of the number of chance eyes suggested by the number of times suggestion effect is executed, so that the chance eye effect is executed when the chance eye effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance eye is stopped, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the chance eye production and improve the game interest.

The flow of the effect when the chance eye effect and the number-of-times suggestion effect are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Here, a case where the conditions (3) and (4) among the execution conditions of the above-mentioned chance eye effect are satisfied will be described as an example. That is, in the situation where the jackpot hold is stored as the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number "2", the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number "1" is digested. , Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is changed from "2" to "1", and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol related to the digestion is executed based on the deviation fluctuation pattern "P7", and is based on this deviation fluctuation pattern "P7". The case where the chance eye effect and the number of times suggestion effect are executed in the variable effect will be described as an example. In addition, as a chance eye production pattern, the case where the chance eye stop count is 5 times and the chance eye appearance pattern is "blue chance eye → green chance eye → green chance eye → red chance eye → red chance eye" is explained as an example. To do. In FIG. 55, the first production hold 9a corresponding to the first special figure hold (big hit hold) that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is indicated by a black circle (●), and the chance eye effect (pseudo continuous effect) is shown. The first effect hold 9a corresponding to the first special figure hold (off hold) to be executed is indicated by a white circle (◯).

FIG. 55 (A) shows the first special figure hold (big hit hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number “2” that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect (and the number of times suggestion effect), and the chance eye effect (and the number of times). The first special figure hold (off hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number "1" in which the suggestion effect) is executed is stored, and the first special figure hold associated with the earliest first special figure hold digestion. The display contents of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) when the special figure variation (variation effect) is completed are shown. In addition, FIG. 55 shows the minimum display contents necessary for explaining the outline of the chance eye effect and the number-of-times suggestion effect, and shows other effect images such as backgrounds and characters that can be displayed in the variable effect. It is omitted.

From the state of FIG. 55 (A), when the first special figure hold (off hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number "1" in which the chance eye effect is executed is exhausted, it is shown in FIG. 55 (B). As a result, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started, and the display position of the first effect hold 9a is shifted to the right. Then, after a while from the start of the variation display (the variation effect), the blue chance eye is stopped and displayed as the first chance eye stop as shown in FIG. 55 (C). This first chance stop is the first temporary stop in the pseudo-ream related to the fluctuation effect, and the blue chance stop is displayed until a predetermined temporary stop time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. To. When the chance eye is stopped (temporarily stopped), the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped (temporarily stopped) substantially at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the chance eye is stopped and displayed, in order to appeal to the player for the stop display of the chance eye, the effect image E that colors the stopped displayed chance eye is displayed as a stop display of the effect symbol 8. It is configured to be displayed in the surroundings (see FIGS. 55 (C), (E), etc.) and to output a predetermined chance stop sound from the speaker 67. The display of the effect image E and the output of the chance stop sound are also referred to as "effect production". By displaying the effect image E and outputting the chance eye stop sound in accordance with the chance eye stop display in this way, the player is drawn to the chance eye stop display, and the effect of the chance eye stop is produced. It becomes possible to increase. It should be noted that the mode of effect production executed in accordance with the stop display of the chance eye is not limited to this embodiment, and for example, the illuminations provided on the game board or the front frame may be made to emit light, or a movable combination may be performed. It is possible to take various modes such as operating an object. In addition, one or more of the display effect by the image display device, the light effect by the illumination member such as the board lamp and the frame lamp, the sound effect by the speaker, and the movable effect by the movable decorative member (movable accessory, gimmick). An effect effect can be produced by using an effect (effect device).

After the first chance eye is stopped, when the effect symbol 8 resumes the variable display as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the number suggestion image K suggesting how many times the chance eye is stopped and displayed is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed at a predetermined display position of 7a. The number-of-times suggestion image K is configured to include a number indicating the remaining number of times that the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the display is started with the start (restart) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, and the next chance. It is erased from the screen before the eyes are stopped and displayed. The effect of temporarily displaying the number-of-times suggestion image K in this way is the number-of-times suggestion effect.

In FIG. 55 (D), the number-of-times suggestion image K displays the number “4”, suggesting that the chance th stop will be performed four more times. Therefore, the player recognizes through the display of the number-of-times suggestion image K (the number-of-times suggestion effect) that the stop display of the fourth chance indicated by the number-of-times suggestion image K is performed by the end of the variation effect. can do. In addition, at the time of displaying the first number-of-times suggestion image K (at the time of FIG. 55 (D)), a total of five chance-th stops including the four times indicated by the number-of-times suggestion image K are used for the variation effect. It becomes clear to the player that this is done.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the number-of-times suggestion effect, along with the display of the number-of-times suggestion image K, a voice that informs the player of the number of remaining stop display times of the chance eye so as to be audible is output. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of stop impressions of the chance eye not only visually but also auditorily.

After the first chance stop, the re-variation display (pseudo 2) of the effect symbol 8 and the number-of-times suggestion effect are performed, and when the number-of-times suggestion image K is erased from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55 (E). In addition, the green chance eye is stopped and displayed as the second chance stop. At this time, the effect effect at the time of the first chance stop is executed as in the case of the first chance stop. After that, as shown in FIGS. 55 (F) to 55 (K), the re-variation display of the effect symbol 8 (pseudo 3 to pseudo 5), the display of the number of times suggestion image K (number of times suggestion effect), and the chance eye stop (third time to). The fifth time) is performed in the same manner. Then, the fifth chance stop (after the display of the first number of times suggestion image K, the fourth chance stop) is a fixed stop of the effect symbol 8 in the variation effect, and the fifth chance stop is the relevant. The fluctuation production ends. In this way, the chance eye effect and the number of times suggestion effect are executed in the variation effect (12 second variation) based on the deviation variation pattern "P7".

Following this, when the first special figure hold (here, the jackpot hold) that triggered the execution of the chance eye effect is exhausted, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started as shown in FIG. 55 (L). The display position of the first effect hold 9a is shifted to the right. Then, since the fluctuation effect is based on the jackpot hold, after the start of the variation display, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 55 (M), and the reach effect proceeds. After that, a specific effect (super reach effect, development effect, etc.) having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed, and finally the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet), and the jackpot is confirmed.

The above is the outline of the chance eye effect of the state A. In the chance eye effect of this example, the number suggestion effect by displaying the number suggestion image K and outputting the remaining stop display number by voice is also executed. In this number-of-times suggestion effect, the number of suggestions (remaining number of times) is reduced by 1 each time the chance-eye is stopped and displayed in the chance-eye effect (FIGS. 55 (D) to (F)-. (H)-(J)). That is, the number-of-times suggestion effect is executed as a countdown effect that counts down the remaining stop display number of the chance eye. Then, the chance eye stop for the number of times counted down by the countdown effect is executed. Further, after the end of the variable effect in which the chance eye effect is executed, a specific effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed. For this reason, the countdown effect (number suggestion effect) executed together with the chance eye effect is an effect that indicates the remaining stop display number of the chance eye by the countdown, and also indicates the remaining period until the specific effect is started by the countdown. But also. As a result, it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the number of times that the production symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye in the chance eye production, and it is possible to raise the player's feelings as the chance eye production progresses. It will be possible.

The mode of the number-of-times suggestion effect executed together with the chance-eye effect is not limited to this embodiment, and for example, the illuminations provided on the game board and the front frame correspond to the number of stop display times of the chance-eye effect. It is possible to take various modes such as blinking the number of times of blinking and operating the movable accessory at that number of times. In addition, one or more of the display effect by the image display device, the light effect by the illumination member such as the board lamp and the frame lamp, the sound effect by the speaker, and the movable effect by the movable decorative member (movable accessory, gimmick). The number of times suggestion effect can be performed by using the effect (effect device). Further, in this embodiment, the execution of the number-of-times suggestion effect is started when the first chance stop is performed, but the execution of the number-of-times suggestion effect is performed before the first chance stop is performed. It may be started. In this case, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed based on the chance eye effect pattern in which the number of chance eye stops is 5 in a certain variation effect, the number "5" is displayed with the start of the variation effect. The number-of-times suggestion effect can be performed by displaying the number-of-times suggestion image K on the display screen and then decreasing the number of the number-of-times suggestion image K by 1 each time the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance. Further, the display position of the number-of-times suggestion image K does not have to be on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and may be on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. Can be. In this case, the number-of-times suggestion image K can be displayed on either one or both of the display screen 71a and the display screen 72a. Alternatively, it is also possible to display the number-of-times suggestion image K on all of the display screen 7a, the display screen 71a, and the display screen 72a. By displaying the number-of-times suggestion image K on the three display screens in this way and performing the number-of-times suggestion effect, the player pays attention to the chance eye effect and the number-of-times suggestion effect (the number of times the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye). It becomes easier to collect images, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

The chance eye effect described above is an example of the case where the conditions (3) and (4) among the execution conditions of the chance eye effect described above are satisfied, but the above-mentioned (1) and (4) Even when the conditions of (2) and (4) are satisfied, the chance eye effect is executed in the same manner as the flow shown in FIG. 55. However, if the conditions (1) and (4) are satisfied and the chance eye effect is executed, the next change after the variation effect based on the deviation pattern "P7" in which the chance eye effect is executed is completed. Specific effects such as reach effects and development effects are not always executed in the effects.

[Selection of resident image]
Further, in the state A, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state in which a demonstration effect for waiting for customers is executed (also referred to as a "customer waiting state" or a "demo state"), or identification information (special symbol and / or effect). The second image display provided on the upper left and right sides (both left and right sides outside the game area) of the front frame 51 by the player operating a predetermined input means to input the selection instruction during the variable display of the symbol). An effect image (also referred to as a "resident image") that is normally displayed on either one or both of the device 71 and the third image display device 72 can be arbitrarily selected from a plurality of types of images prepared in advance. It is configured. Then, when the above-mentioned specific effect (specific effect) is executed as the effect symbol game effect (variable effect), the specific effect can be executed with the content reflecting the selection result. Hereinafter, the selection of the resident image by the player and the specific effect reflecting the selection result will be described.

In the following, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided on the upper left and right sides of the front frame 51 (both left and right sides outside the game area) are also collectively referred to as a "sub liquid crystal", and the second image. The display device 71 is also referred to as a "left sub liquid crystal", and the third image display device 72 is also referred to as a "right sub liquid crystal". Further, the image display device 7 provided in the substantially center (inside the game area) of the game board 2 (game area 3) is also referred to as a "main liquid crystal". Further, in the following example, it is assumed that the resident image is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal (display screen 71a).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of characters with a singer as a motif are set as characters appearing in the game production executed by the image display device, and an image representing each character (person) is set. Image data) is provided as a resident image. Specifically, as the characters, male characters B1 to B5 with the motif of each person (member) of the male group composed of five male singers, and each member of the female group composed of five female singers. Female characters L1 to L5 with the motif of (member) are set. Then, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, or when the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable effect) and the effect using the effect button 63 (button effect) is not being performed, the player When the first effect button 63a is operated (pressed), a menu screen (not shown) for setting (customizing) the effect environment of the gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal.

Here, the production environment means, for example, various effects such as the brightness of the display screen, the volume of sound effects, the brightness of illuminations, whether or not the hold look-ahead notice is executed, and the jackpot reliability of a specific notice effect or reach effect. It defines the conditions for this. Since multiple items of the effect environment that can be set are displayed on the menu screen for setting such an effect environment, the player can select the item to be set (customized) from the items displayed on the menu screen. You can select and make the desired settings (customization) for the selected item. The process related to the display of the menu screen based on the operation (pressing) of the first effect button 63a is performed in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Then, in this embodiment, apart from the effect button 63, an operation lever (not shown) for inputting an operation signal (detection signal of the operation detection switch) to the sub-control board 90 is around the upper plate 61 of the front frame 51. It is provided in. Like the effect button 63, this operation lever functions as an input means for the player to input. The selection / setting input related to the production environment through the above-mentioned menu screen can be performed by operating this operation lever.

On the above-mentioned menu screen, as one of the items of the production environment that can be set, an item (character selection) for instructing selection acceptance of the character (also referred to as "resident character") that is normally displayed on the sub liquid crystal is displayed. Will be done. When this character selection item is selected, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the character selection process (S4306) shown in FIG. 56, so that the selection of the resident character can be accepted.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the character selection process (S4306), first, the character selection screen G1 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal (S5001). For the display of the character selection screen G1, a command instructing the start of display of the screen is transmitted to the image control board 100, and the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 that receives the command corresponds to the display from the image ROM. This is done by reading out the image data and displaying it on the display screen 71a.

Here, an example of the character selection screen G1 displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal is shown in FIG. 57 (a). As shown in the figure, the character selection screen G1 is provided with an information display area S extending in the left-right direction below the character selection screen G1. In the information display area S, character information (a plurality of types of effect information) corresponding to each of the above-mentioned male characters B1 to B5 and female characters L1 to L5 is displayed. Specifically, for all the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5, information indicating a name (name) and a face (a plurality of types of effect information) is displayed. In this embodiment, the character information corresponding to three characters among all the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5 is displayed and becomes visible, and the type of the visible character information is operated. It can be changed by operating the lever. That is, in the information display area S, by operating the operation lever and tilting it in either the left or right direction, the character information displayed there is in the same direction (left direction or right direction) as the tilting direction of the operation lever. It is designed to scroll. As a result, the character information of all the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5 is displayed so as to be visible. Then, one character information displayed in the center of the information display area S in the left-right direction becomes the character information to be selected, and the character image CG1 corresponding to the character information to be selected is above the information display area S (character). It is displayed on the selection screen (approximately the center of G1) (male character B1 is scheduled to be selected in FIG. 57A). The type of the character image CG1 displayed in the substantially center of the screen is changed in conjunction with the scroll display of the character information in the information display area S. In this way, on the character selection screen G1, character information (a plurality of types of effect information) corresponding to each of the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5 can be selected based on the operation of the operation lever (input means). Is displayed in.

Returning to FIG. 56, in S5002 following S5001, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction input (scroll instruction input) for scrolling the character information displayed in the above-mentioned information display area S (S5002). This scroll instruction input is generated by inputting the detection signal (operation signal) to the sub-control board 90 when the operation lever is tilted in either the left or right direction as described above. When it is determined that there is a scroll instruction input in S5002 (YES in S5002), the character information displayed in the information display area S is scrolled and displayed in the same direction as the tilting direction of the operation lever (left direction or right direction). Let (S5003). This scroll display is executed by the display control of the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 that receives the command for instructing the scroll display from the sub control board 90. On the other hand, if it is determined by S5002 that there is no scroll instruction input (NO in S5002), the process proceeds to S5004 without processing S5003.

Next, the S5004 determines whether or not there is an instruction input (character confirmation instruction input) for confirming the resident character (S5004). Here, the operation lever is integrally provided with a push button (not shown) that can be pressed, and when this push button is pressed, the detection signal (operation signal) is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. It is supposed to be entered. The character confirmation instruction input is generated when the detection signal (operation signal) of the push button is input to the sub-control board 90.

When it is determined by S5004 that there is a character confirmation instruction input (YES in S5004), the character information displayed in the center of the information display area S at that time is the character information of the resident character (resident image) ("resident character". Accept the selection as selected as "information" (S5005). Then, the received character information is stored as resident character information in a predetermined area (resident character information storage area) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S5006), and the display of the character selection screen G1 is finished to select the resident character. The resident character determination screen G2 showing the result is displayed on the display screen 71a (S5007), and the character selection process (S4306) is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5004 that there is no character confirmation instruction input (NO in S5004), the character selection process (S4306) is completed without performing the processes of S5005 to S5007.

For the display of the resident character determination screen G2 by the S5007, a command instructing the display start of the screen is transmitted to the image control board 100, and the CPU (image control microcomputer 101) of the image control board 100 that receives the command transmits the image ROM. This is performed by reading out the corresponding image data from the above and displaying it on the display screen 71a. As shown in FIG. 57B, the character image CG2 (corresponding image) corresponding to the resident character information whose selection has been accepted by S5005 is displayed on the resident character determination screen G2. This character image CG2 is an image for resident character determination notification. FIG. 57B shows a case where the male character B1 is selected as the resident character. The player can confirm which character information (effect information) has been accepted (selected) as the resident character information (resident character information) through the resident character determination screen G2.

The display of the resident character determination screen G2 (character image CG2) automatically ends when about 5 seconds have passed from the start. After that, the above-mentioned menu screen is displayed again on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without input related to item selection in this state, or the player Operates the operation lever to input a predetermined end instruction, and the display of the menu screen ends.

When the resident character is selected in this way and the display of the menu screen is completed, the character image corresponding to the resident character information (effect information) stored in the S5006 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal, that is, The character image (corresponding image) corresponding to the character information (effect information) received by S5005 is displayed as a resident image. Although the illustration of the display contents is omitted, on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal, a character image corresponding to one of the male characters B1 to B5 and the female characters L1 to L5 selected as the resident character is, so to speak, a background. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can confirm which character (character information) is currently selected as the resident character (resident character information) through the character image displayed on the display screen 71a.

Then, while the resident character (resident image) is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal (display screen 71a), on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), the effect display (variation of the effect symbol 8) related to the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is displayed. Display, the above-mentioned chance eye production, etc.) are performed. Under these circumstances, in the present embodiment, it is possible to further execute a specific effect accompanied by displaying an effect image corresponding to the type (classification) of the character displayed as a resident character and outputting a music corresponding to the effect image. Hereinafter, the production contents of the specific production will be described.

[Production content of specific production]
As described above, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is mainly determined based on the variation pattern designation command from the main control unit 80, and is executed based on the effect pattern (S4404 or the like). reference). The variation pattern specification command includes information (variation pattern information) indicating the variation pattern related to the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation pattern is selected when the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment is incorrect. Fluctuation patterns (also called "first variation patterns") that are likely to be selected (in other words, less likely to be selected in the case of a big hit) and are likely to be selected in the case of a jackpot (in other words, A variation pattern (also referred to as a "second variation pattern") that is unlikely to be selected in the case of deviation is included. For example, among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9, "P1" to "P11" exist in the fluctuation patterns related to the first special symbol that is mainly variablely displayed in the state A. Of these, for example, the fluctuation pattern (P1, P4) of 120 seconds, which has the longest fluctuation time, is likely to be selected when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (P1), and when it is off. It is unlikely to be selected (P4). On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern (P7) with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds and the fluctuation pattern (P11) with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds are not likely to be selected when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and in the case of a deviation. It has become one that may be selected for. From this, it can be said that the fluctuation patterns "P7" and "P11" belong to the above-mentioned first fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation patterns "P1" and "P4" belong to the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern.

When a variation effect based on the variation patterns "P1" and "P4" is executed, a super reach effect, a development effect, etc. that are not executed by the variation effect based on the variation patterns "P7" and "P11" whose fluctuation time is relatively short, etc. There is a possibility that a specific effect (specific effect) is executed in the variable effect. That is, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation patterns "P1" and "P4" is transmitted from the main control unit 80, and based on this, the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) performs the above-mentioned variation effect start processing ( When a variable effect pattern is set in S4505 of S4404), a variable effect pattern including a specific effect is set in the S4505. A plurality of specific variation effect patterns are provided in advance as variation effect patterns including this specific effect (also referred to as "specific variation effect pattern"), and a plurality of specific variation effects are based on the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504. When a specific variable effect pattern (also referred to as "special specific variable effect pattern") is selected from the effect patterns, it is displayed on the effect image corresponding to the current resident character (resident character information) and the corresponding music. A variable effect including a specific effect (here, a super reach effect) is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the characters appearing in the game production are composed of male characters B1 to B5 with the motif of each member of the male group composed of five male singers, and five female singers. Female characters L1 to L5, which are motifs of each person in the female group, are set, and the player can arbitrarily select a resident character from the female characters L1 to L5. This selection result is reflected in the variation effect (specific effect) based on the special specific variation effect pattern.

In this embodiment, as a specific effect for the variation effect based on the special specific variation effect pattern, the image and music of the male group to which the male characters B1 to B5 belong are reproduced (also referred to as "first specific effect"). , A specific effect (also referred to as "second specific effect") in which the video and music of the female group to which the female characters L1 to L5 belong is reproduced, and further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect are provided. Is provided with a plurality of types of specific effects, each of which has a different image and music. Specifically, as a plurality of types of first specific effects, the first specific effect A in which the video A and the music A are played, the first specific effect B in which the video B and the music B are played, and the video C and the music C are played. The first specific effect C to be performed is provided. Further, as a plurality of types of second specific effects, the second specific effect D in which the video D and the music D are reproduced, the second specific effect E in which the video E and the music E are reproduced, and the video F and the music F are reproduced. The second specific effect F is provided.

When setting a special specific variation effect pattern as the variation effect pattern related to the variation display this time in the above-mentioned S4505, the effect control microcomputer 91 is currently selected by referring to the resident character information stored in the above-mentioned S5006. Identify the resident character that is (accepted). Then, a specific effect corresponding to the group to which the specified resident character belongs (male group or female group in this example) is selected, and a special specific variable effect pattern including the selected specific effect is set (S4505).

For example, when the currently selected resident character is the male character B1, any of the first specific effects A to C is based on the first special symbol hit / miss judgment result, the lottery result using the random number for the variable effect pattern, and the like. And set a special specific variation effect pattern including the selected first specific effect. Further, when the currently selected resident character is the female character L2, any of the second specific effects D to F is based on the first special symbol winning / failing determination result, the lottery result using the random number for the variable effect pattern, and the like. And set a special specific variation effect pattern including the selected second specific effect.

When the variation effect start command for starting the variation effect based on the special specific variation effect pattern set in this way is transmitted to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 is specified based on the variation effect start command. The image data corresponding to the special specific variation effect pattern is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the effect image based on the read image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. In accordance with this, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads out the music data corresponding to the special specific variation effect pattern, and transmits the music based on the read music data to the speaker 67 (predetermined output) via the voice control board 106. Output from part). As a result, when the specific effect (here, the super reach effect) is executed in the variation effect based on the special specific variation effect pattern, the character information (effect information) whose selection is accepted by the above-mentioned character selection process (S4306) is added. The corresponding effect image (video) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the music corresponding to the character information (effect information) is output from the speaker 67, and the effect reflecting the selection result by the player is developed. Become. As a result, it is possible to enhance the taste of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed by the variable effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

In particular, in this embodiment, the specific effect capable of reflecting the selection result by the character selection process (S4306) described above is likely to be selected in the case of a big hit, and may be selected in the case of a loss. Since it is an effect that is executed by a variation effect based on a low variation pattern (second variation pattern), it is possible to execute an effect that raises expectations for a big hit in a form that reflects the selection result by the player. It has become. As a result, it becomes possible to easily attract the attention of the player to the specific production, and it is possible to further enhance the taste of the specific production.
Further, when selecting a resident character, the character selection screen G1 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal, and the information (character information, effect information) of the character to be selected is displayed there, while the selection result is reflected. The effect image related to the specific effect is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, which has a screen size larger than that of the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the effect of the effect when the specific effect that reflects the result of the selection by the player is executed.

It is also possible to set the jackpot reliability for each of the first specific effects A to C and the second specific effects D to F. That is, for each of the first specific effects A to C and the second specific effects D to F, the selection rate selected when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment are By setting the selection rate selected in the case of deviation in consideration of the jackpot reliability, for example, among the first specific effects A to C, the first specific effect A, the first specific effect B, and the first specific effect are specified. The jackpot reliability increases in the order of the effect C, and the jackpot reliability increases in the order of the second specific effect D, the second specific effect E, and the second specific effect F in the second specific effect D to F. can do. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability can be set high or low through the first specific effects A to C and the second specific effects D to F. That is, a plurality of types of effect images and songs corresponding to the character information (effect information) whose selection has been accepted by the above-mentioned character selection process (S4306) are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of effect images and songs is provided. When it is displayed and output, the jackpot reliability may be configured to differ depending on the type of the displayed and output production image and the music. As a result, it is possible to further increase the attention of the player to the specific effect and further enhance the taste of the specific effect.

Further, in this embodiment, as the characters appearing in the game production, male characters B1 to B5 with the motif of each of the male groups composed of five male singers, and a female group composed of five female singers. Female characters L1 to L5 with each person as a motif are set, and the character information (multiple types of production information) corresponding to each of these characters is displayed in a selectable manner by the player, and the game is played from among them. It is possible for a person to accept the selection of desired character information (resident character information, effect information). Regarding this selection target, in addition to the character with the singer as the motif, for example, the character with the motif of a person in another field such as sports or art can be used, and in addition to the person, various characters such as cats and dogs can be used. It can also be a character with the animal motif of the above, or an anime character. Furthermore, in addition to characters, for example, items with motifs such as jewels and precious metals can be used. In other words, various elements (production elements) that make up the production, such as characters, items, songs, and backgrounds that can be set to appear in the game production, are selected as targets, and a plurality of types of production information (item names) corresponding to these are selected. , The title of the music, etc.) can be displayed by the player in a selectable manner, and the selection of desired production information can be accepted from the display.

Further, as a specific effect capable of reflecting the selection result by the character selection process (S4306) described above, a button effect that generates a predetermined effect (operation-compatible effect) based on the operation of the effect button is included, and the character is selected. It is also possible to make the execution mode of the button effect different for each type of character (effect information) that can be selected and displayed on the screen G1. For example, the type of effect button to be operated (first effect button, second effect button, operation lever, etc.) can be determined according to the type of the selected character, or the operation mode of the effect button (press once, repeated hits, etc.). Types of effect buttons (operation means, input means) to be operated and their types, such as by determining (long press, rotation, etc.) and the mode (effect content) of the operation-compatible effect based on the operation of the effect button. It is possible to make the operation mode and the content of the effect based on the operation (operation corresponding effect) different depending on the type of the selected (selectable) character (effect information). In this way, it is possible to enhance the taste of the effect (button effect) using the effect button.

[Game production of state B]
The game effect executed in the state B which is the low probability high base state (low probability and second game state) or the high probability high base state (high probability and second game state) is mainly the second start port 21. This is an effect symbol game effect (variation effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination triggered by entering the ball. As described above, in the state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a situation where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the effect mode E, a fluctuation count image (not shown) showing the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the high base state is displayed on a predetermined portion (for example, the upper part of the screen) of the display screen 7a. The remaining number of fluctuations shown by the fluctuation count image is displayed by subtracting once each time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, with the initial value of 100 times, which is the maximum number of continuations in the low accuracy and high base state. .. The initial value of 100 times is set regardless of whether the effect mode E is in the low probability high base state (low probability and second game state) or in the high probability high base state (high probability and second game state). This is because the high base state (second game state) is continued unless a big hit occurs until the variation display is performed at least 100 times. Further, the effect mode E is a game state non-notification mode, and it is determined whether the game state (state B) is a low accuracy high base state or a high accuracy high base state until at least 100 fluctuation displays are performed. This is because it is necessary to make it difficult (impossible) to distinguish through the production.

Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times without a big hit in the effect mode E (state B), if the game state (state B) related to the effect mode E is the low accuracy and high base state. With the 100th variation display, the low accuracy high base state ends, the gaming state shifts to the low accuracy low base state, and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". On the other hand, if the gaming state (state B) related to the effect mode E is the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state and the effect mode E are continued even after the 101st time. When the effect mode E continues after the 101st time in this way, the display mode of the fluctuation count image remains in a special mode indicating the number of fluctuations "infinity" (for example, an image consisting of the characters "infinity" and the symbol "∞"). Is displayed.

In this embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E is automatically performed as the transition to the state B is performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). Further, since the state B is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, in the effect mode E, the right-handed instruction image M for instructing the right-handed is displayed on a predetermined portion of the display screen 7a (for example, the upper right of the screen). It is displayed (see FIG. 58).

In the state B (effect mode E), as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "6", and "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "4", and "9" consisting of green symbols are used. Then, the symbols "3", "5", and "7" consisting of the red symbols are displayed. The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed. In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B. The mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 may be the same in the state A and the state B.

Under such an effect mode and a symbol, as shown in FIG. 58, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the variation display is basically a third stop mode (see FIG. 58 (a)). It is stopped at (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58 (b)). This is because, in the state B, the first special symbol time saving function and the high base generation function are activated, so that the out-of-reach variation can be digested in as short a time as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that the special game (big hit game) cannot be executed immediately after the stop, so that the player can expect. Don't be afraid of people. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation (that is, "reach fluctuation"), or when the "reach out-of-reach fluctuation" (a type of fluctuation mode without reach), which is actually a normal fluctuation, is performed. If so, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIGS. 58 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f). reference). Further, even when the chance eye effect is performed in the state B described later, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol).

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in an out-of-order manner (separate stitch) as a result of the variation display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) as a result of the variable display, the jackpot game can be executed, and when the jackpot game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. The types of jackpots that can occur in state B are, in principle, the same as in state A. This is because the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed. Then, the game state after the big hit game ends is a high probability low base state (state C, third game state) when the big hit game is based on "15R first big hit" or "4R second big hit", and "4R In the case of "3rd big hit", it becomes a high probability high base state (state B, high probability and 2nd game state), and in the case of "4R 4th big hit", it becomes a low probability high base state (state B, low probability and 2nd game state). 2 game state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, in the low accuracy high base state of the state B, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the first special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) without a big hit, the predetermined number of times. The game state shifts to the state A (low accuracy low base state) by executing the eye variation display (disengagement variation), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B" after the end of the variation display. ..

Further, in the state B (effect mode E), the chance eye effect can be executed as a notice effect (special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice) based on the result of the preliminary determination (S322) of the first special figure hold. The chance eye effect of the state B is different from the chance eye effect of the state A described above in the effect content (effect mode). Hereinafter, the chance eye effect executed in the state B will be described focusing on the portion different from the chance eye effect in the state A.

[State B chance eye production]
In the above-mentioned state A, when all three symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) constituting the effect symbol 8 are stopped and displayed in the same color (same classification), the stop roll (same color roll) is displayed. It was a chance eye (red chance eye, green chance eye, blue chance eye). On the other hand, in the state B, the stop result when the three symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) constituting the effect symbol 8 are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols that are scattered and in a specific arrangement order is displayed. I have a chance. Specifically, the numbers of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are "2-3-4", "4-5-6", and "6-7". The result of "-8" is defined as the chance of state B. Of these, the chance of "2-3-4" is also called the "first chance", and the chance of "4-5-6" is also called the "second chance", "6-7-". The chance of "8" is also called "third chance".

The order of the symbols constituting the chance eye is not limited to this embodiment, and for example, "1-2-3", "5-6-7", etc. are arranged in ascending order from left to right. The symbol combinations of are defined as chance eyes, or the symbol combinations arranged in descending order from left to right such as "3-2-1" and "6-5-4" may be defined as chance eyes. In addition, for example, a combination of symbols that form a pun having a specific meaning, such as "2-2-3" (Mt. Fuji) or "8-3-1" (vegetables), may be defined as an opportunity.

Further, in this embodiment, among the three symbols constituting the chance eye when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye in the state B, the jackpot reliability is determined by the type (number in this example) of the middle symbol 8C. It suggests the degree. Specifically, when the middle symbol 8C constituting the chance eye is "3", and the first special figure hold that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect exists, the hold is "15R 1st jackpot", " The appearance rate of the chance eye is set so that the possibility of holding the jackpot related to "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot" is the highest. The jackpot reliability is set to decrease in the order of "7" and "5". In other words, the relationship between the jackpot reliability of each chance is "second chance" <"third chance" <"first chance".

Here, in the state B, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the type of the middle symbol among the three symbols constituting the chance eye, in the state B, the first special symbol time saving state in which the first special symbol time saving function is activated. This is because the execution (start) and stop (end) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) are repeated in a short time, and it is easy for the player to instantly grasp the jackpot reliability when the chance eye is stopped and displayed. To do. This also affects the stop order when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the state B, that is, the middle symbol becomes the final stop symbol (second stop mode: left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). That is, by drawing the player's attention to the symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end, the ease of grasping the jackpot reliability is improved.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the jackpot reliability when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the state B is not limited to the type of the middle symbol, but is suggested by the type of the left symbol or the type of the right symbol. It is also possible to do it. In this case, it is also possible to determine the symbol stop order (stop mode) when the chance eye is stopped and displayed according to the type of the symbol related to the suggestion of the jackpot reliability. For example, when suggesting by the type of the left symbol, the left symbol can be the final stop symbol, and when suggesting by the type of the right symbol, the right symbol can be the final stop symbol. In addition, when the chance eye is displayed as a stop, the stop order (stop mode) is determined each time, and as a result of the determination, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the type of the symbol that became the final stop symbol. It is also possible to configure. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion of the jackpot reliability when the chance eye is stopped and displayed.

Further, the chance eye effect of the state B is executed when an execution condition different from the above-mentioned chance eye effect of the state A is satisfied. Specifically, (A) when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 becomes "0" due to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", a new special figure 1 start is entered. The generation of spheres or the reserved digestion of the number of reserved spheres "1" in Special Figure 1), and the fluctuation display is off and executed based on the fluctuation pattern "P19" (see FIG. 9), (B) The first special symbol. When the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 becomes any of "1" to "3" due to the start of the fluctuation display of, the number of reserved balls is out of the "1" to "3" and the fluctuation pattern "P17" or "P18" (See FIG. 9), the out-of-hold (specific out-of-hold, specific acquisition information) that triggers the execution of the variation display is stored, and the variation display is out of alignment and the variation pattern “P19” (see FIG. 9). (C) When the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 becomes any of "1" to "3" due to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of reserved balls "1" to The jackpot hold (specific acquisition information) that triggers the execution of the fluctuation display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern "P15" or "P16" (see FIG. 9) is stored in "3", and the fluctuation display is stored. It satisfies either of the facts to be executed based on the deviation fluctuation pattern "P19" (see FIG. 9), and (D) starts the fluctuation display of the first special symbol based on the deviation fluctuation pattern "P19". When the "chance eye notice" is set as the notice effect (notice effect pattern) in the variable effect start processing (S4404) at the time of performing (S4506), the chance eye effect is executed.

Further, in the chance eye effect of the state A, the chance eye stop is executed a plurality of times (within one variation) in one variation effect by utilizing the variation effect by the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream effect). However, in the chance eye effect of the state B, one chance eye stop is executed for each variation effect (one variation). This is because the state B is the first special symbol time saving state, and it is difficult to secure the time for stopping and displaying the chance eye a plurality of times during one variation effect.

It should be noted that, in the situation where the specific out-of-hold (out-of-order fluctuation pattern "P17" or "P18") is memorized, the chance eye effect is performed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern "P17, P18" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more ( (See FIG. 9), this is because the reach effect (P18) and the specific effect (P17) are executed as the variation effect based on the variation pattern. Further, the chance eye effect is performed in the situation where the jackpot hold is stored for the same purpose as in the case of the chance eye effect in the state A described above. By configuring the reach effect and the specific effect to be executed through the chance eye effect in this way, in the state B in which the first special symbol time is shortened, a short-time fluctuation of mainly 2 seconds (disengagement fluctuation pattern "P19") While the first special symbol variation display based on the above is executed, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's expectation for the big hit and improve the game interest.

The chance eye production pattern of the state B is a pattern in which the first chance is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a "first chance pattern") and a pattern in which the second chance is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a "second chance pattern"). ) And a pattern for stopping and displaying the third chance (also referred to as a "third chance pattern"), for a total of three types of patterns. Then, depending on which of the above-mentioned (A), (B), and (C) is satisfied among the execution conditions that trigger the decision to execute the chance eye effect, the number of times the chance eye effect is executed ( The number of stop impressions of the chance eye) is determined. For example, when the chance eye effect is executed by satisfying the conditions (A) and (D), the number of times the chance eye effect is executed is one.

Further, in the case where the chance eye effect is executed by satisfying the conditions (B) and (D) and the case where the chance eye effect is executed by satisfying the conditions (C) and (D). It is possible to determine the number of executions based on the number of balls held in Special Figure 1 up to the digestion of the specified off hold or the jackpot hold (specific acquired information). For example, when the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number "3" is a specific out-of-specification hold or a big hit hold, the special figure 1 reserved ball number "1", "2" is reached before the hold digestion. Since the two first special figure reservations are exhausted, the maximum number of times the chance eye effect is executed is two. In this case, the chance eye effect may be executed by the variable effect based on the first special figure hold digestion of each of the special figure 1 reserved ball numbers "1" and "2", or the first special figure hold of either one. You may perform a chance eye effect with a variable effect based on digestion. However, when the chance eye effect is executed with the variable effect based on the digestion of all the first special figure hold up to the digestion of the specified off hold or the jackpot hold, the chance eye notice must be executed twice or more in succession. Therefore, the effect as a so-called "continuous notice" can be obtained, and it becomes possible to further enhance the interest.

Next, the flow of the effect when the chance eye effect is executed in the state B will be described with reference to FIG. 59. Here, a case where the chance eye effect is executed based on satisfying the conditions (3) and (4) among the execution conditions of the chance eye effect described above will be described as an example. Specifically, the jackpot hold is stored as the first special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number "4", and the special figure 1 hold ball number "1" until the jackpot hold is exhausted. When the chance eye effect is executed by the variable effect based on the digestion of the first special figure hold corresponding to each of "3", that is, the first special figure hold (big hit) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number "4". The case where the chance eye effect is executed three times before the hold digestion will be described as an example. In addition, as the chance eye production pattern, the first chance first stop is the "second chance pattern" (big hit reliability: low), and the second chance stop is the "third chance pattern" (big hit reliability: low). Middle), it is assumed that the "first chance pattern" (big hit reliability: high) is set for the third chance stop. The determination (setting) of the chance eye effect pattern in the state B is the same as the determination (setting) of the chance eye effect pattern in the state A described above with the preliminary determination result of the first special figure hold (special figure 1 hold look-ahead result). , It is performed based on the chance eye effect pattern determination table (not shown) that defines the selection condition (selection rate) of the chance eye effect pattern in the state B, the random number for determining the advance notice effect, and the like (S4506).

FIG. 59 (A) shows the first special figure hold (big hit hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved ball number “4” that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect, and the special figure 1 hold ball on which the chance eye effect is executed. The 1st special figure hold (off hold) corresponding to the numbers "1" to "3" is stored, and the 1st special figure change (variation effect) due to the earliest 1st special figure hold digestion is stored. The display contents of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) at the time of termination are shown. It should be noted that FIG. 59 shows the minimum display contents necessary for explaining the outline of the chance eye effect, and the illustration of other effect images such as backgrounds and characters that can be displayed in the variable effect is omitted. .. Further, in FIG. 59, the first effect hold 9a corresponding to the first special figure hold (big hit hold) that triggers the execution of the chance eye effect is indicated by a black circle (●), and the first effect is executed. The first production hold 9a corresponding to the special figure hold (off hold) is indicated by a white circle (○).

When the first special figure hold (off hold) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold ball number "1" is digested from the state of FIG. 59 (A) (special figure 1 hold ball number "4" state), FIG. As shown in 59 (B), the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started, and the display position of the first effect hold 9a is shifted to the right. At this time, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "3". Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time (2 seconds in this case) of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation production) elapses, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the second chance ("4-5") is set as the first chance stop. -6 ") is displayed as a stop (fixed stop), and the variation display (the variation effect) ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the state B, the size of the middle symbol 8C (the symbol related to the suggestion of the jackpot reliability) (the symbol) among the three symbols constituting the chance eye. The size) is stopped and displayed in a manner larger than the other two symbols (left symbol 8L and right symbol 8R) (see FIGS. 59 (A), (C), (E), and (G)). In this way, by displaying the medium symbol 8C related to the suggestion of jackpot reliability with a large emphasis compared to the other symbols 8L and 8R, it is easy for the player to pay attention to the suggestion of the chance eye stop and the jackpot reliability. It becomes possible to do. Such highlighting of the middle symbol 8C corresponds to the effect effect when the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the display of the effect image E executed when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the above-mentioned state A (FIG. 55). See) is synonymous with. The effect effect associated with the stop display of the chance eye in the state B is not limited to the mode in which the middle symbol 8C is displayed larger than the other symbols 8L and 8R as in the present embodiment. For example, the other symbols 8L and 8R may be darker than usual to display the middle symbol 8C with normal brightness or brighter than usual according to the stop display of the chance eye, or the middle symbol may be displayed according to the stop display of the chance eye. The effect effect associated with the stop of the chance eye may be executed by bouncing only the 8C and displaying it, or rotating and displaying only the middle symbol 8C in accordance with the stop display of the chance eye. Further, a predetermined sound effect (chance eye stop sound) may be output in the same manner as the chance eye stop in the state A, or the effect may be produced by using other lighting members, movable decorative members, or the like. Good.

When the next 1st special figure hold (off hold) is exhausted after the 1st chance stop, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started as shown in FIG. 59 (D), and the 1st effect hold 9a The display position is shifted to the right. At this time, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "2". Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time (2 seconds in this case) of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation effect) elapses, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the third chance ("6-7") is set as the second chance stop. -8 ") is displayed as a stop (fixed stop), and the variation display (the variation effect) ends. At this time as well, the effect effect (highlighting of the middle symbol 8C) is executed in the same manner as the first chance stop. It is also possible to make the mode of effect production different from that of the first chance stop. For example, it is possible to output a stop sound different from the first time, or to make the operation when the middle symbol 8C stops and display different from the first time.

After the second chance stop, when the next 1st special figure hold (off hold) is exhausted, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started as shown in FIG. 59 (F), and the 1st effect hold 9a The display position is shifted to the right. At this time, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "1". Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time (2 seconds in this case) of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation production) elapses, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the first chance ("2-3") is stopped as the third chance stop. -4 ") is displayed as a stop (fixed stop), and the variation display (the variation effect) ends. At this time as well, the effect effect (highlighting of the middle symbol 8C) is executed in the same manner as the first and second chance stop. As described above, it is also possible to make the mode of effect production different from that of the first and second chance stop.

When the next 1st special figure hold (big hit hold) is exhausted after the 3rd chance stop, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started as shown in FIG. 59 (H), and the number of balls held in special figure 1 is held. Is "0". Since the first special figure hold digested at this time is a big hit hold that triggered the execution of the chance eye production this time, after the start of the fluctuation display, the reach is established as shown in FIG. 55 (I), and the reach is established. It will proceed to the production. After that, a specific effect (super reach effect, development effect, etc.) having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed, and finally the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet), and the jackpot is confirmed.

The above is the outline of the chance eye effect of the state B. Unlike the chance eye effect of the state A described above, the chance eye effect of the state B has a stop display of the chance eye for each fluctuation effect (variation display). It is performed once, and the configuration mode of the chance eye is not that all three symbols are the same color, but it is composed by the order of the three symbols (in this example, the ascending order from the left symbol to the right symbol). Has been done. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the chance eye according to the game state, and the difference between the chance eye that can be stopped and displayed in the state A and the chance eye that can be stopped and displayed in the state B is the player. It will be possible to draw attention and improve the game atmosphere.

Further, in the chance eye production of state A, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the colors (classifications) of the three symbols constituting the chance eye, whereas in the chance eye production of state B, among the three symbols constituting the chance eye. The jackpot reliability is suggested by the type of the number of one symbol (middle symbol in this example). As a result, the method of suggesting the jackpot reliability differs between the case where the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye in the state A and the case where the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye in the state B. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to each chance.

Further, the mode of the effect effect executed when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye is different between the chance eye effect of the state A and the chance eye effect of the state B. As a result, it is possible to make the mode of the effect effect different depending on the game state in addition to the chance eye, and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the stop display when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed at the chance eye.

[Game production in state C]
The game effect executed in the state C, which is the high accuracy and low base state (third game state), is mainly based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the ball into the third starting port 26. The effect symbol game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the effect associated with the occurrence of a small hit (small hit game effect). The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state) in which a large number of prize balls can be expected to be obtained by the small hits between the big hits by frequently causing the small hits until the next big hit occurs. For this reason, in the state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed.

Further, in the state C, as described above, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Here, in the second embodiment, the effect modes C and D in the state C are set as internal modes for the effect control, and various effect images (effects) displayed on the display screen 7a in the effect mode C and the effect mode D. The basic production modes such as (designs, background images, etc.) and various production sounds (voice, music, sound effects, etc.) output as the production progresses are the same. For this reason, the player recognizes that there is only one type of effect mode corresponding to the state C on the surface (apparently). On the other hand, the execution of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect related to the 15R jackpot fluctuation) performed when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "big hit" and the type of the jackpot is "15R fifth jackpot". The aspect is different between the effect mode C and the effect mode D. Therefore, the effect mode D functions as a trigger for executing (generating) the variation effect related to the 15R jackpot variation in a mode different from the normal (effect mode C).

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game related to the jackpot (15R first jackpot, 4R second jackpot, 15R fifth jackpot) that triggers the transition to state C is completed, the sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) determines. Under the control, the effect mode C (mode status "3") is set by default with the transition to the state C. Then, while the game in the state C progresses, when a predetermined mode transition condition is satisfied, the production mode D is set instead of the production mode C (shift to the production mode D), and then a big hit occurs in the production mode D. If the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) without doing so, the effect mode C is set again (returns to the effect mode C).

The mode transition condition is, for example, that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without a big hit in the effect mode C, or that the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) determines the mode transition condition. By winning the mode transition lottery executed under control and pre-judgment related to the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold look-ahead), the specific hold (for example, 15R 5th jackpot hold) is stored in the second special figure hold. It is possible to determine that the device is determined to be the one and the mode transition lottery is won. Further, the effect mode C and the effect mode D may be periodically switched based on the passage of a predetermined time by using an internal timer.

As described above, although "C" or "D" is internally set as the effect mode in the state C, the effect mode is basically the same (one type) on the surface (apparently). Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the basic effect mode corresponding to the state C is “C”.

In the effect mode C (state C), as shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8. , A background image, a character, etc. (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode are displayed. Similar to the state B (effect mode E), the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect mode C is a symbol of "2", "6", "8" composed of blue symbols and a "1" composed of green symbols. It is composed of "4" and "9" symbols and "3", "5" and "7" symbols consisting of red symbols. Further, in this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same in the state B and the state C. The aspect (design) of the effect symbol 8 related to the state C may be the same as that of the state A, different from the state B, different from both the state A and the state B, and the like. It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60A, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handedness is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of winning prize balls (acquired) is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C showing the profit amount) is displayed. The right-handed instruction image M is the same as the state B (effect mode E). The prize ball count image C is composed of an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a five-digit number of "00000" to "99999" and a character image of "pt" (point). This prize ball count image C mainly displays the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won) acquired by the player in the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. as the number of points, and the game state after the big hit game is displayed. When the state C is reached, the number of prize balls won during that period (so-called consecutive villas) until the game state becomes state A (excluding during the big hit game) or state B, that is, until the state C ends. The number of prize balls won during the period) is displayed. Further, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit game increases), the prize ball acquisition (increase in the number of balls held) in the small hit game is obtained. The prize ball count image C is displayed for directing. That is, as the small hit game effect, the effect display (ball entry effect) by the prize ball count image C is performed.

The basic flow of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 (effect symbol game effect) in the effect mode C of the screen configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60. In FIG. 60, for convenience of explanation, some display contents such as production hold (holding symbol) and background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 60, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 60A), the variation display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 60). 60 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so that the deviation variation without reach can be digested in the shortest possible time so that the game can proceed smoothly. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is "off" and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation, the variation display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that the special game (big hit game, small hit game) cannot be executed immediately after the stop. .. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (fanning effect) for increasing the expectation of the player is not performed.

On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by reach fluctuation (missing or jackpot) or reach fanning deviation fluctuation, the effect symbol 8 The variation display of is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see FIGS. 60 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being "small hit", the variation display is performed in the normal variation, and then the first stop mode (left). It is stopped at the symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), and as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific random pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 60 (g) → (h) → (i)). ).

Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two adjacent symbols out of the three symbols are the same, and the remaining one is different (“335”, “355””. , "557", etc.) is set as a specific variation (small hit mode). Although the symbol combination that constitutes a specific pattern does not establish reach, it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols have the same symbol (number). Therefore, such a symbol combination is called "reach arrangement". Also called.

Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that make up a specific loose eye (small hit mode), the symbols "3" and "5" form a specific loose eye in state A. Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be obtained, in the state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific random pattern. That is, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol types change depending on the game state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pattern type (color type in this example) of the effect pattern and to attract the interest in the game. In particular, when small hits occur frequently, the stop display of a specific ballet (small hit mode) is frequently executed, and the stop display may be displayed multiple times in succession, so that the player's attention is further increased. It will be possible to collect.

In this embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “5”, “9”) which are green symbols in the state A, and a specific disparity (first display mode) in the state C. The red symbol that can be configured is used. For example, a part of the effect symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") that are blue symbols in the state A may be a red symbol, or the state A. The blue design ("2", "4", "6", "8") and the green design ("1", "5", "9") It is also possible to make a part of (for example, "4" and "5") a red pattern. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C that does not exist (appear) in the state A may be provided, and a specific random pattern (small hit mode) may be formed by the symbols belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) can be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is a green symbol in the state A can be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the symbol types that can form a specific pattern more prominent and to easily attract the attention of the player.

Alternatively, the symbol "7", which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning in the state A, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, in the state C, the symbols "3" and "5", which are the red symbols (second symbol type), are set as symbols that can form a specific doublet (small hit mode), and the gold symbol (third symbol). The symbol of "7" which is a species) can be a 15R jackpot mode (doublet of "7", specific display mode) corresponding to the 15R fifth jackpot. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that constitutes a specific doublet (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific doublet (15R jackpot mode) are clearly distinguished, and the hit type. It is possible to show the correspondence between and the symbol type in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, any one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the middle symbol 8C) is provided with a symbol dedicated to the small hit (for example, the "small hit medium symbol") that is stopped and displayed when the small hit is won. When the hit-only symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol dedicated to the small hit is used regardless of the type of the remaining symbols, that is, regardless of the stop result (stop display mode) composed of the three symbols. The occurrence of a small hit (small hit winning) may be notified. This also makes it easier to understand the occurrence of small hits and makes it easier to attract the attention of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol →) that cannot appear in other effect modes. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stopping the middle symbol → the right symbol). For this reason, not only the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also the stop mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode attracts the player's attention. Further, in the effect mode C, the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbols) is performed when the derivation display of the small hit mode (stop display of the effect symbol 8) is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), an effect image E (effect image) configured as an image (decorative image) that decorates the periphery of each of the left, middle, and right symbols is displayed. .. As a result, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display according to the first stop mode is stopped, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in a small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as a trigger, the winning prize ball indicated by the prize ball count image C for each entry. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the winning prize shown by the prize ball count image C The number of spheres is added in units of 10. The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) shown by the prize ball count image C is also referred to as "acquired profit effect". Further, when the small hit game is executed triggered by the display of the small hit mode, the effect display (character) by the character (not shown) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a is accompanied by the execution of the small hit game. (Direction) is to be performed. Specifically, it is intended to perform an effect (character effect display + dialogue voice output) in which the character emits a predetermined line, or an effect (character motion display) in which the character shows a predetermined movement.

In addition, the addition display of the prize ball count image C accompanying the small hit sub-controls the second big prize opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. The character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the reception by the unit 90, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is based on the reception of the small hit opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90. Therefore, all of these effects correspond to small hit game effects (S4407, S4408).

In the production mode C (state C), the winning probability (small hit probability) of the small hit in the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is very high (“420/630” = “1 / 1.5”), and the small hit game is played. Since there is a high possibility that it will be executed a plurality of times in succession, the stop in the first stop mode of the effect symbol 8 and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) occur frequently, and the small hit mode is accompanied by this. The addition display of the prize ball count image C and the character effect display in the winning game can also be executed with high frequency. For this reason, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the occurrence of small hits by coordinating such a production symbol game production (variable production) with the small hit game production. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for winning a prize ball (increasing the number of balls held) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the game interest in the production mode C (state C). It should be noted that the character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the character production is not performed unless the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the entry when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 is performed. It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. In the third embodiment, a characteristic configuration is added to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described first or second embodiment regarding the setting of the ending period when the jackpot game ends. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the third embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first and second embodiments will be omitted.

As described in the first embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed and all the round games constituting the jackpot game are completed, the jackpot end process (S2116) for ending the jackpot game (special game state) is performed. It takes place and the ending period (also called the "end period") begins (S2117). Then, when the ending period elapses (YES in S2119), the big hit game (special game state) ends, and the game state after the big hit game is set (S2121). From this, it can be said that the ending period (end period) is a waiting period from the end of all rounds of the jackpot game to the start of the game state after the jackpot game.

In the jackpot end process (S2116), a process of setting a jackpot ending command is performed. In addition to the command set, a process of setting the ending period to a predetermined timer (also referred to as an "ending timer") (end period setting process). ) Is performed. The process of S2117 is a process of starting the time measurement (operation of the ending timer) by the ending timer.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs processing related to the setting of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also referred to as a “state control means”. Further, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that performs the process of setting the ending period in the above-mentioned S2116 is also referred to as “end period setting means”.

The ending command set in S2116 is a command for instructing the sub-control unit 90 to execute the ending effect, and when the sub-control unit 90 receives the command, a predetermined ending effect is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is executed. The execution period (execution time) of the ending effect corresponds to the ending period starting in S2117, that is, the ending period set in S2116, and the ending effect is designed so that it can be executed within this ending period. ing. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the ending period and the ending effect are determined based on the game state when the special symbol winning / failing determination determines the jackpot and the jackpot type.

Specifically, when the gaming state is state A (low accuracy low base state) or state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state), that is, when it is not state C (high accuracy low base state). , Mainly, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed. In this state A or state B, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is the 4R third, which has a relatively high appearance rate among the big hit types related to the first special symbol. In the case of a big hit or a 4R 4th big hit (when the game state after the big hit game becomes state B), in S2116 executed at the end of the big hit game, the length of the ending period (ending time) is "30000 ms". The first ending period (first end period) set to (30 seconds) is set (set). That is, "30000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a first ending command for designating the first ending period (30000 ms) is set. When this first ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (first ending effect) based on the first ending command. The details of the ending effect will be described later.

Further, in the state A or the state B, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is a 15R first big hit or a 4R second big hit (the gaming state after the big hit game is In the S2116 executed at the end of the jackpot game (when the state C is reached), the second ending period (second end period) in which the length of the ending period (ending time) is "3000 ms" (3 seconds) is set. It is set (set). That is, "3000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a second ending command for designating the second ending period (3000 ms) is set. When this second ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (second ending effect) based on the second ending command.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the state C (high accuracy low base state, third gaming state), the second special symbol hit / miss determination is mainly executed. In this state C, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is the 15R fifth big hit with a relatively high appearance rate among the big hit types related to the second special symbol. In the case of (when the game state after the big hit game becomes the state C), in S2116 executed at the end of the big hit game, the length of the ending period (ending time) is set to "3000 ms" (3 seconds). 3 Ending period (3rd end period) is set (set). That is, "3000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a third ending command for designating the third ending period (3000 ms) is set. When this third ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (third ending effect) based on the third ending command.

Further, in the state C, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and the result of the judgment of the big hit type is the 2R 6th big hit or the 2R 7th big hit (the gaming state after the big hit game is in the state B). In S2116, which is executed at the end of the jackpot game, a fourth ending period (fourth end period) in which the length of the ending period (ending time) is "5000 ms" (5 seconds) is set (set). ). That is, "5000 ms" is set in the ending timer. Further, in S2116, a fourth ending command for designating the fourth ending period (5000 ms) is set. When this fourth ending command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90, the sub control unit 90 executes the corresponding ending effect (fourth ending effect) based on the fourth ending command.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the length of the ending period is different depending on the game state (game state at the time of the big hit) when the special symbol hit / fail judgment is determined as a big hit and the big hit type. ing. That is, in the state A or the state B, when a big hit (4R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the state B occurs and the game state becomes the state B after the big hit game, the first The ending period (30,000 ms) is set, and in the state A or the state B, a big hit (15R first big hit or 4R second big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the state C occurs, and the state C is changed after the big hit game. In that case, the second ending period (3000 ms) is set, and in the state C, a big hit (15R 5th big hit) in which the game state after the big hit game becomes the state C occurs, and the state C becomes the state C after the big hit game. In this case, the third ending period (3000 ms) is set, and in the state C, a big hit (2R 6th big hit or 2R 7th big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes the state B occurs, and after the big hit game When the state B is reached, a fourth ending period (5000 ms) is set.

Therefore, when the state A or the state B is changed to the state B through the big hit game, after the end of all round games in the big hit game, one breath is left before the state B is entered. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that the state C does not shift and the same state B continues. This is because the first ending period has a sufficient length as a time for maintaining / improving the player's motivation to play and refreshing his / her feelings. In particular, in state A or state B, the jackpot in state B (4R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot) is more than the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is in state C (15R first jackpot or 4R second jackpot). ) Has a higher appearance rate (see FIG. 8 (B)), so it is relatively easy that a jackpot occurs but does not shift to the state C or the same state B continues. Considering the psychology of the player under such a situation, it can be said that it is very effective to leave a certain period before the start of the state B (before the transition) after the big hit game.

Further, when the state A or the state B is changed to the state C through the big hit game, the state C is promptly changed after the end of all round games in the big hit game. In this case, after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to start the game in an advantageous game state (high accuracy and low base state) in which small hits occur frequently. This fosters a sense of speed of "a game in which the big winning opening (big winning opening for big hits or big winning opening for small hits) repeatedly opens" that is developed from the big hit game to the state C, and improves the game interest. It is possible to make it.

Further, even when the state C is changed to the state C again after the big hit game, the state C is promptly changed after the end of all round games in the big hit game. Even in this case, after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to start (restart) the game in an advantageous game state (high accuracy and low base state) in which small hits occur frequently. As a result, a sense of speed is fostered in the "game in which the big winning opening (big winning opening for big hits or big winning opening for small hits) is repeatedly opened" that is developed from the state C to the big hit game and then to the state C again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In particular, in the state C, the appearance rate of the big hit (15R 5th big hit) in the state C is higher than that in the big hit (2R 6th big hit or 2R 7th big hit) in which the gaming state after the big hit game is in the state B. Since it is high (see FIG. 8B), the possibility that the state C will continue (continuation rate) is relatively high. Considering the psychology of the player under such a situation, it can be said that it is very effective to promptly start the state C after the big hit game when the state C is changed to the state C again after the big hit game.

Further, when the state C is changed to the state B through the big hit game, the state B is changed after a short time after the end of all round games in the big hit game. As a result, while giving the player the recognition that the game in the state C has been completed, the game smoothly shifts to the game in the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) in which the player continues to hit right. Is possible. In particular, when the jackpot game changes from the state C to the state B, the jackpot game is a 2R jackpot game, and the number of times the first jackpot 30 is opened (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game) is compared with other jackpot games (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game). The number of rounds) is small and the opening time is short. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot game is relatively short. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the ending period of the big hit game (2R big hit game) when the state C is changed to the state B through the big hit game is changed to the state B from the state A or the state B through the big hit game. The fourth ending period (5000 ms) is shorter than the first ending period (30,000 ms). If the ending period of the 2R jackpot game is set to a long time (for example, 30000 ms) like the 4R 3rd jackpot and the 4R 4th jackpot that trigger the setting of the state B, the balance with the execution period of the 2R jackpot game is balanced. This is to avoid such a concern because there is a possibility that the transition to the state B, in which the player continues to hit right, will be delayed.

By setting the ending period as described above, it is possible to make a difference in the transition mode of the game state, which makes it possible to give a sharpness to the progress of the game and improve the game interest. The length of each ending period (ending time) is only an example, and the time is not limited to this embodiment. At least, the ending period related to the jackpot that triggers the setting of state B (trigger to shift to state B) is longer than the ending period related to the jackpot that triggers the setting of state C (trigger to shift to state C). , Each ending period (time) may be determined. However, the first ending period is preferably 15 seconds to 60 seconds, preferably 20 seconds to 40 seconds. This is to secure the time for suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the state C is not changed or the same state B continues, and the execution time of the first ending effect described later.

Further, the third ending period of each of the above ending periods is the ending period when the state C is changed to the state C again after the big hit game (when the state C continues), but the state C before the big hit game and the big hit In consideration of the continuity with the state C after the game, the length of the third ending period can be set to a time shorter than 3000 ms. For example, after all rounds of the jackpot game are completed, the time may be approximately the same as the time required for the control process (big hit end process) for setting (starting) the game state in which the symbol can be changed, or between the round games in the jackpot game. Considering the interval time, it is also possible to set the time to be substantially the same as or less than the interval time (for example, 1000 ms to 2000 ms). If the third ending period is approximately the same as or less than the interval time, the transition to state C after the end of all rounds in the jackpot game will be performed more smoothly and quickly. To further emphasize the sense of unity between the state C and the big hit game in which the hit game is executed frequently, and the sense of speed of the "game in which the big winning opening is repeatedly opened" developed from the big hit game to the state C. Is possible.

Next, the effect (ending effect) executed in each of the above ending periods will be described. In the following, among the first to fourth ending periods, the first ending effect executed in the first ending period, which is the longest ending period, and the ending executed in each of the other second to fourth ending periods. The production will be described in order from the latter, separately from the production (second to fourth ending production).

[2nd to 4th ending production]
The second ending effect is executed during the second ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 15R first jackpot or the 4R second jackpot occurs in the state A or the state B. The second ending period is 3000 ms (3 seconds), and the second ending effect is executed during this 3000 ms. The 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot are jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is the state C. Therefore, the second ending effect is an effect of notifying the start of the state C (transition to the state C). In the second ending effect mode (effect content), for example, a character image of "Entering XX mode!" (XX mode means state C) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the sound of the character is output. It is supposed to be. The mode of the second ending effect is not limited to this, and any mode may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the state C is started.

The third ending effect is executed during the third ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 15R fifth jackpot occurs in the state C. The third ending period is 3000 ms (3 seconds), and the third ending effect is executed during this 3000 ms. The 15R fifth jackpot is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the state C again. Therefore, the third ending effect is an effect of notifying the continuation of the state C. The third ending effect mode (effect content) is, for example, to display a character image of "○○ mode continued!" (○○ mode means state C) on the display screen 7a and output the sound of the character. It is supposed to be. The mode of the third ending effect is not limited to this, and any mode may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the state C continues.

The fourth ending effect is executed during the fourth ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 2R 6th jackpot or the 2R 7th jackpot occurs in the state C. The fourth ending period is 5000 ms (5 seconds), and the fourth ending effect is executed during this 5000 ms. The 2R jackpot that can occur in the state C is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is the state B. Therefore, the fourth ending effect is an effect of notifying that the state C ends and shifts to the state B. In the fourth ending effect mode (effect content), for example, a character image of "△△ mode entry" (△△ mode means state B) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode of the fourth ending effect is not limited to this, and any mode may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the state C ends and shifts to the state B. Further, as described above, the effect mode E is set in the state B, and the effect mode E is the game state non-notification mode. From this, the fourth ending effect related to the 2R 6th jackpot and the 4th ending effect related to the 2R 7th jackpot have the same (common) effect mode (effect content). It becomes difficult (impossible) to determine whether the game state (probability state) after the big hit game is the low probability high base state (low probability state) or the high probability high base state (high probability state) through the ending effect. This is to make it so.

[1st ending production]
The first ending effect is executed during the first ending period set at the end of the jackpot game when the 4R third jackpot or the 4R fourth jackpot occurs in the state A or the state B. The first ending period is 30,000 ms (30 seconds), which is significantly longer than the other ending periods (second to fourth ending periods). The first ending effect is executed during the 30,000 ms, and the effect mode (effect content) is significantly different from the above-mentioned second to fourth ending effects.

Specifically, in the first ending effect, the image display device is in the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) after the ending effect, that is, after the big hit game related to the 4R third big hit or the 4R fourth big hit. A character selection effect that selects a character to be displayed on (at least one of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 72, and the third image display device 72) from a plurality of predetermined characters. Will be executed. The character selection effect executed as the first ending effect is substantially the same as the selection of the resident character (resident image) in the second embodiment described above, and the execution time of the character selection and the type of character (selection target) that can be selected are determined. , It is different from the above-mentioned Example 2.

That is, also in the third embodiment, "male characters B1 to B5" and "female characters L1 to L5" are set as the characters appearing in the game production, as in the second embodiment. The female characters L1 to L5 "are defined as characters that can be selected in the character selection effect executed as the first ending effect (also referred to as" selection target character "). Any of these female characters L1 to L5 is configured so that the player can operate and select the above-mentioned operation lever. The selection using this operating lever is the same as in the second embodiment described above. The number (type) of characters to be selected (candidates) in the character selection effect is not limited to this embodiment, and can be increased or decreased as compared with this embodiment. .. The selection target character may be "male characters B1 to B5", or may be all or part of "male characters B1 to B5" and "female characters L1 to L5". It is also possible to select a character other than these, other items, a background (effect mode), and the like. Further, the number (type) of characters to be selected from a plurality of characters does not have to be one, and two or more (plural) characters can be selected within a range not exceeding the number of characters to be selected. It is also possible to.

When the first ending period is started (S2117), the first ending effect (character selection effect) is started accordingly. At this time, the character selection screen H1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 62 (a). Here, in the above-described second embodiment, the character selection screen G1 is displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal (see FIG. 57), but the character selection screen H1 in the first ending effect is displayed. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. This is because, during the ending period, the variable display of the special symbol or the effect symbol as the identification information is not executed (executable). It is also possible to configure the character selection screen H1 to be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal as in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 62A, the character selection screen H1 performs character selection with an information display area J in which character information (a plurality of types of effect information) corresponding to each of the female characters L1 to L5 is displayed. It is configured to include a remaining time display area T that displays the remaining time (the remaining time until the end of character selection) that can be created in a countdown format. The information display area J occupies most of the character selection screen H1, and the remaining time display area T is provided in a part of the character selection screen H1 (upper part of the screen in this example).

As shown in FIG. 62A, five character card images corresponding to each of the female characters L1 to L5 are displayed in the information display area J. In the character card image, the name (name) and face of the character and information indicating the content of the advance notice effect corresponding to the character are represented so as to be visible to the player. In the information display area J, one character card image is displayed larger than the other character card images on the front side of the center, and this large character card image is the one character to be selected. (Direction information) is shown. Further, the remaining time displayed in the remaining time display area T is a time within a range that does not exceed the length of the first ending period (30 seconds in this example).

If the character selection screen H1 is displayed and the above-mentioned operation lever is tilted to the left before the remaining time displayed in the remaining time display area T becomes "0", it is displayed in the information display area J. When all character card images move clockwise and the operation lever is tilted to the right, all character card images move counterclockwise, resulting in a character card located in front of the center of the information display area J. The image is switched. In this embodiment, the movement display of the character card image in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction is performed by the operation lever. For example, a cross key, an operation dial, or the like is used. It may be performed by another input means provided so that the player can operate it.

While the character selection screen H1 is displayed (during the first ending period), the player operates the operation lever while viewing the character card image displayed in the information display area J to select a desired character. .. Then, when the character card image corresponding to the desired character is located (displayed) on the front side of the center of the information display area J and the push button (not shown) provided on the operation lever is pressed, the operation is performed. The character card image (displayed) located on the front side of the center is enlarged and displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 62 (b) (character selection reception screen). The figure shows how the female character L1 is selected. As a result, the character confirmation instruction input (character selection) is accepted, and the information (selected character information) for enabling the accepted (selected) character to be identified ex post facto in control is provided by the sub-control board 90. It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. In this way, on the character selection screen H1, character information (a plurality of types of effect information) corresponding to each of the female characters L1 to L5 is displayed so as to be selectable based on the operation of the operation lever (input means). It has become.

Then, in the state B after the lapse of the first ending period (after the big hit game), the image (character image) of the character corresponding to the character selected in the first ending effect (character selection screen H1) before the start of the state B is displayed. , Is displayed on the display screen (predetermined display unit) of a predetermined image display device (at least one of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 72, and the third image display device 72). As a result, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment of state B. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the first ending effect (character selection effect) and the character display in the state B after the first ending effect, and it is possible to enhance the game interest of the state B.

Here, in the character card image displayed in the information display area J, as described above, information (effect information) indicating the content of the advance notice effect corresponding to the character is represented. This is because the advance notice effect corresponding to the content (effect information) shown in the selected character card image is configured to be executed in the state B. That is, the character selection on the character selection screen H1 also serves as the selection of the execution mode (notice mode, notice effect pattern) of the advance notice effect that can be executed in the state B. Specifically, each character is associated with the advance notice effect pattern, such as the advance notice effect pattern A for the female character L1 and the advance notice effect pattern B for the female character L2, and the character displayed in the information display area J. By selecting the character based on the card image, the notice effect pattern is also selected. Then, the advance notice effect based on the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the selected character (effect information) can be executed in the state B after the lapse of the first ending period. That is, the character selection effect executed as the first ending effect during the first ending period is a notice mode selection effect for allowing the player to select one of a plurality of predetermined advance notice modes (notice effect patterns). But also.

The notice effects that can be executed in the state B are mainly the "change notice" that suggests the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) for the change display (also called "the change") currently being executed, and the first. 1 There is a "special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice" that suggests the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) for the first special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit. Among the plurality of types of notice effects belonging to the "change notice" or "special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice", some notice effect execution modes (notice effect patterns) correspond to the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen H1. It is said that it can be attached and selected. The notice effect that suggests the reliability of the jackpot is also referred to as "suggestion effect", and the sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) that controls the execution of the advance notice effect is also referred to as "suggestion effect execution means". Say.

As shown in FIG. 63, the notice effect pattern A corresponding to the female character L1 is a notice effect belonging to the change notice, and the first stop symbol is stopped from the change start at a predetermined time during the symbol change (for example, the change stop (provisional)). It is said to be a "line notice" in which the female character L1 issues a predetermined line suggesting the reliability of the jackpot until the stop).

Further, the advance notice effect pattern B corresponding to the female character L2 is a advance notice effect belonging to the change advance notice, and is an operation instruction image (No. 1) showing how the female character L2 prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. 1) An image imitating the effect button 63a) is displayed on the display screen 7a at a predetermined time during the symbol change, and the player operates (presses) the first effect button 63a in response to the display. It is a "button notice" that displays a predetermined image suggesting the degree on the display screen 7a.

Further, the advance notice effect pattern C corresponding to the female character L3 is a advance notice effect belonging to the change notice, and is a predetermined time suggesting that the change is a big hit change at a predetermined time during the symbol change (for example, when the reach is established). It is said to be a "big hit notification" that outputs the voice of the female character L3 from the speaker 67 in the voice of the female character L3.

Further, the notice effect pattern D corresponding to the female character L4 is a notice effect belonging to the special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice, and is a notice target among the first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c. The display mode of the first effect hold 9a (for example, the display color, shape, design, type, size, etc. of the effect hold) is changed from the normal display mode to a predetermined notice display mode suggesting jackpot reliability. It is said to be "pending change notice".

Further, the advance notice effect pattern E corresponding to the female character L5 is a advance notice effect belonging to the special figure 1 hold look-ahead advance notice, and is a predetermined value that suggests the jackpot reliability across a plurality of consecutive variation displays (variation effect). It is said to be a "continuous notice" that displays a notice image or outputs a predetermined notice sound.

When any of these advance notice effect patterns A to E (female characters L1 to L5) is selected, in the state B, in the above-mentioned S4506, the advance notice effect (the change advance notice) related to the change effect to be started from now on can be set. When setting the special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice based on the special figure 1 effect hold information stored in S4402 described above, the notice effect based on the selected notice effect pattern can be set. Hereinafter, the advance notice effect setting process (S6000) of the present embodiment relating to the setting of the advance notice effect in the state B will be described. This advance notice effect setting process (S6000) is executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 as the process of the above-mentioned S4506.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the advance notice effect setting process (S6000), first, a process related to the setting of the advance notice effect corresponding to the selected character is executed (S6001). The process of S6001 is a process related to the advance notice effect corresponding to the character (selected character information) selected through the character selection screen H1 (first ending effect) described above. As described above, the advance notice effect corresponding to the character selected through the character selection screen H1 (also referred to as "preliminary effect for selected character") includes three types of change advance notices based on the advance notice effect patterns A to C and a notice. Two types of special figure 1 hold look-ahead notices based on the effect patterns D and E are provided (see FIG. 63). For this reason, in the S6001, the setting regarding whether or not the advance notice effect corresponding to the selected character (selected character information) among those advance notice effects is executed is performed with reference to the selected character corresponding advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 65. .. As shown in FIG. 65, as the selected character corresponding notice effect determination table, the selected character corresponding advance notice effect determination table A (also referred to as “table A”) corresponding to the fluctuation notice and the special figure 1 hold look-ahead advance notice are supported. A notice effect determination table B for selected characters (also referred to as “table B”) is provided.

In the table A shown in FIG. 65 (a), execution probabilities (execution conditions) are defined for each of the three types of fluctuation notices based on the notice effect patterns A to C. Specifically, for each of the notice effect patterns A to C, the case where the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination related to the fluctuation is "missing" and the case where the result is "big hit", respectively, of the advance notice effect The value of the random number for determining the advance notice effect (value of "0 to 99" in this example) for determining the presence or absence of execution is divided into "non-execution" and "execution". According to Table A of the present embodiment, when the selected character is the female character L1, "line notice" is executed as a notice effect corresponding to this, and in the case of a miss, a 60% probability is executed, and a big hit. In some cases, it is executed with a 40% probability. In addition, when the selected character is a female character L2, a "button notice" is executed as a notice effect corresponding to this with a 40% probability in the case of a miss, and a 50% probability in the case of a big hit. Will be executed. Furthermore, when the selected character is a female character L3, the "big hit notification" is not executed as a notice effect corresponding to this (execution probability: 0%), and 80% in the case of a big hit. It is executed with the probability of. Therefore, in the state B, when looking at the three types of fluctuation notices, the dialogue notices are relatively likely to appear, and the button notices and the jackpot notices are less likely to appear in this order. On the other hand, the jackpot reliability of the jackpot notification is the highest (100% in this example), and the jackpot reliability decreases in the order of button notice and dialogue notice.

Further, in the table B shown in FIG. 65B, execution probabilities (execution conditions) are defined for each of the two types of special figure 1 hold look-ahead notices based on the notice effect patterns D and E. Specifically, for each of the notice effect patterns D and E, only the first special figure hold (off hold) in which the special figure 1 hold look-ahead result is "off" is stored, and the special figure 1 hold look-ahead In each case where the first special figure hold (big hit hold) whose result is "big hit" is stored, the value of the random number for determining the notice effect for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect (in this example, "" (Values from 0 to 99) are divided into "non-execution" and "execution". As for the jackpot hold, it is sufficient that at least one jackpot hold exists in the first special figure hold stored at the time of processing the S6001. According to Table B of this embodiment, when the selected character is a female character D, a "hold change notice" is stored as a notice effect corresponding to this, but the jackpot hold is not stored and only the off hold is stored. It is executed with a probability of 50% in both the case where the jackpot is held and the case where the jackpot hold is stored. Further, when the selected character is the female character L5, "continuous notice" is executed as a notice effect corresponding to this, and when only the off hold is memorized, it is executed with a probability of 40%, and the jackpot hold is memorized. If so, there is a 60% chance that it will be executed. Therefore, in the state B, with respect to the two types of special figure 1 hold look-ahead notices, the hold change notices are relatively likely to appear, and the jackpot reliability of the continuous notices is relatively high.

In the S6001, based on the character (selected character information) selected on the character selection screen H1, the corresponding advance notice effect determination table (table A or B) is referred to to determine whether or not to execute the selected character corresponding advance notice effect. , When executing, set the notice effect pattern. In addition, when executing the processing of S6001, it has already been decided to execute the special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice "hold change notice" or "continuous notice", and currently, "hold change notice" or "continuous notice" Is being executed, S6001 does not perform the process related to the setting of the special figure 1 hold look-ahead notice. This is to prevent the "pending change notice" or the "continuous notice" from being started (executed) in duplicate.

Further, in S6001, when determining whether or not to execute the selected character corresponding notice effect related to the hold look-ahead notice based on the table B, the number of the first special figure hold (the number of special figure 1 hold balls) stored at that time is determined. If it is "2" or more, the decision is made, and if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "1" or less, the decision is not made. This is to secure the execution period of the notice effect when the selected character corresponding notice effect (in this example, "hold change notice" or "continuous notice") related to the hold look-ahead notice is executed, and enhance the effect.

The table for determining the advance notice effect corresponding to the selected character is not limited to each table shown in FIG. 65, and the execution probability (execution condition) is set in consideration of the effect content of each effect, the jackpot reliability, and the like. be able to.

Next, the S6002 executes a process related to the setting of the normal advance notice effect (S6002). The processing of S6002 is the same as the processing of S4506 described in the above-described first embodiment because the setting related to the advance notice production is performed regardless of the result of character selection on the first ending effect (character selection screen H1). is there. However, here, the setting related to the advance notice production is made based on the result of the processing of S6001. That is, when any of the selected character compatible advance notice effects is set in the S6001, the advance notice effects that conflict with the selected character compatible advance notice effects are not executed, or the advance notice effects that interfere with the selected character compatible advance notice effects are not executed. The notice production is set. In this embodiment, when the advance notice effect pattern for the selected character compatible advance notice effect is set in S6001, that is, when the advance notice effect for any of the selected characters is executed, the advance notice effect is not set in S6002 and the normal advance notice is performed. It is configured so that the production is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the selected character corresponding advance notice effect based on the advance notice effect pattern corresponding to the character selected on the character selection screen H1 is executed, another advance notice effect not based on the selection on the character selection screen H1 is executed. The jackpot reliability is higher than when (normal notice production) is executed. For example, when there is a button notice as a notice effect corresponding to a selected character and a button notice as a normal notice effect, the appearance rate of each notice is determined so that the former has higher jackpot reliability than the latter. ing. Then, the display mode of the operation instruction image displayed on the display screen 7a in order to encourage the player to operate the effect button when executing the button advance is different between the selected character correspondence advance effect and the normal advance effect. Specifically, for example, when a button image imitating the appearance of an effect button is displayed as an operation instruction image, the display mode of the button image is set as a special display mode in the selected character corresponding notice effect, and the display mode is set as a special display mode in the normal notice effect. The display mode of the button image is the normal display mode. In this case, as a normal display mode, a button image may be displayed in a predetermined normal size or a predetermined normal color (actual effect button color), and as a special display mode, a button may be displayed. Examples thereof include displaying an image in an extra-large size larger than the normal size, and displaying the image in a predetermined special color (for example, red or gold) different from the normal color. Further, the advance notice effect executed as the advance notice effect corresponding to the selected character can be executed in a manner that is not executed in the normal advance notice effect. For example, the dialogue notice executed as the notice effect corresponding to the selected character is configured to emit a dialogue that is not emitted in the dialogue advance notice executed as the normal advance notice effect. In this way, the configuration that makes (differentiates) the selected character-compatible advance notice effect from the normal advance notice effect can be similarly adopted for the selected character-compatible advance notice effect other than those illustrated here. As a result, it is possible to give a special feeling to the selected character-corresponding notice effect that may be executed only in the state B, and to enhance the effect and the interest when the selected character-corresponding notice effect is executed. The notice effect pattern, the type and content of the notice effect shown in this embodiment are merely examples, and other notice effect patterns and notice effects can be provided according to the number of characters to be selected. Can be set as appropriate.

When a command (variable effect start command) for specifying execution of the advance notice effect (notice effect pattern) set in the advance notice effect setting process (S6000) is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), an image is displayed. The control microcomputer 101 reads a predetermined image data corresponding to the notice effect pattern specified based on the command, that is, the notice effect pattern set by the processing of S6000 from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the read image. Execute a notice production by data. In this embodiment, when the advance notice effect for the selected character set by the processing of S6001 is executed when the advance notice effect is executed, an image (selected character correspondence advance notice execution notification image) for notifying the fact is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. It is configured to be displayed on (notification means). The advance notice execution notification image corresponding to the selected character can be composed of, for example, a telop (character information) composed of the characters "notice is being activated", and the display screen 7a does not interfere with the visual recognition of the telop. The notification can be performed by displaying on either the top, bottom, left, or right side of the. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the advance notice effect (suggestion effect) corresponding to the selected character is executed, and to draw the player's attention to the advance notice effect. Note that the notification that the selected character corresponding notice execution notification effect is executed is not limited to the display of the selected character corresponding notice execution notification image, and for example, a predetermined sound effect suggesting that fact may be output or the board surface An illuminated member (light emitting body) such as a lamp or a frame lamp may emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the first ending effect before the transition to the state B, the character card images (plurality of effect information) corresponding to each of the female characters L1 to L5 are displayed in a selectable manner. It is possible for the player to select a desired character (effect information) from the inside. Then, a notice effect (preliminary effect corresponding to the selected character) in a mode corresponding to the character (selected character information) for which the selection is accepted can be executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol in the state B. .. As a result, it is possible to realize a notice effect (suggestion effect) that reflects the result of selection by the player, and it is possible to enhance the taste of the advance notice effect. In particular, the first ending effect having both the character selection function and the advance notice effect pattern selection function is executed only before the transition from the state A or the state B to the state B after the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the state C, which is the most advantageous gaming state, is not reached, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

Further, the execution conditions of the selected character-corresponding notice effect differ depending on the type of the advance notice effect, that is, the type of the selected character (effect information), and the possibility of the execution condition being satisfied (selected character corresponding notice). The execution probability and appearance rate of the effect are also different (see FIG. 65). As a result, the feasibility (appearance ratio) of the advance notice effect corresponding to the character can be made different depending on the type of the selected character (effect information), and the advance notice effect can be diversified. In addition, this makes it possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the notice effect corresponding to the selected character is executed, and to enhance the interest when the notice effect is executed.

Further, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect corresponding to the character differs depending on the type of the selected character (effect information). Therefore, it is possible to make the derivation possibility of the jackpot different when the notice effect corresponding to the selected character is executed, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the notice effect corresponding to the selected character.

The content (mode), type, execution timing, etc. of the advance notice effect (preliminary effect corresponding to the selected character) that can be executed according to the type of the character selected in the first ending effect (character selection screen H1) are the present implementation. The present invention is not limited to the example, and various advance notice effects can be provided as the advance notice effects corresponding to the selected characters. It is also possible to increase the types (number) of characters (effect information) that can be selected on the character selection screen H1 and increase the types (number) of the selected character-corresponding notice effects accordingly. Further, for example, a plurality of dialogue notice patterns are provided as the production pattern of the "line notice" corresponding to the female character L1, and a plurality of dialogue notice patterns are provided as the production pattern of the "button notice" corresponding to the female character L2. For example, it is possible to provide a plurality of effect patterns for each of the advance notice effects corresponding to the selected character. In this way, it is possible to make the advance notice effect corresponding to the selected character more diverse.

Further, as the notice effect corresponding to the selected character, a plurality of types of button notices are provided, and the execution mode of the button notice (button effect) is provided for each type of character (effect information) that can be selected and displayed on the character selection screen H1. It is also possible to make different. For example, the type of effect button to be operated (first effect button, second effect button, operation lever, etc.) can be determined according to the type of the selected character, or the operation mode of the effect button (press once, repeated hits, etc.). The effect button (operation means, input means) to be operated and its operation mode, such as by determining (long press, rotation, etc.) or the mode (effect content) of the button notice based on the operation of the effect button, Further, it is possible to make the content of the button notice (operation-corresponding effect) based on the operation different depending on the type of the selected (selectable) character (effect information). In this way, it is possible to enhance the taste of the button notice (button production).

Further, in this embodiment, an effect having both a character selection function and a notice effect pattern (notice mode) selection function, that is, a character selection effect and a notice mode selection effect is executed as the first ending effect, but the character selection Either one of the effect and the advance notice mode selection effect may be executed as the first ending effect. Further, for example, the character selection effect is executed in the first half of the first ending period and the notice mode selection effect is executed in the second half, or the notice mode selection effect is executed in the first half and the character selection effect is executed in the second half. The first ending period may be divided into a first period and a second period, and each effect may be executed in each period. Further, the first ending period may be divided into a plurality of periods, and different effects may be executed in each period. Further, as the first ending effect, for example, a mode selection for displaying an effect image such as a dedicated moving image or a still image that can be seen only in the first ending period, or selecting an effect mode that is executed only in the state B. Other effects (directed for the first ending period) different from the character selection effect and the advance notice mode selection effect shown in this embodiment, such as displaying a screen, may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first symbol described later). The variable display shall be synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In this manner, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). (Displayed as), and the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Further, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first effect symbol is displayed. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned configuration of the game machine, a "variable ball entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter a ball and a state in which a game ball cannot enter a ball cannot be entered. It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the 1st hit / fail determination or the 2nd hit / fail determination is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than in the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. , So-called special figure 2 priority control process, control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, a so-called ball entry order (memory order) digestion control process.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary determination) (“Processing at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205)”. See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the method of prior determination is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the starting entry may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure holding storage unit for the pre-determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Was provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) as sub liquid crystal (sub display device), but the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the panel side display means as the main liquid crystal (first image display). It may be provided on the left and right sides of the device 7), or one sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can be done. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) were all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display, for example, a drum display device or the like. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 71. The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of effects by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, two types of effect buttons, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b, are provided, and the player can operate such an effect button (input means). In addition to the known operating means such as buttons, dials, rotating bodies, levers, etc., the parts (operation parts) that the player's hands and fingers touch are made of elastic materials such as silicone rubber and urethane rubber (elastic materials). It is also possible to adopt a special operation means (input means) configured by. As a result, it is possible to foster an unprecedented sense of operation and enhance the taste of the effect (button effect, etc.) using the operation means. In this case, for example, a vibration motor is built in a unit of an effect button including an operation unit made of an elastic material, and the vibration motor is driven when the button effect is executed so that the entire effect button is vibrated. Is also possible. For example, when the player is prompted to operate the effect button (operation unit), the button (operation unit) is vibrated, or when the player pushes or kneads the operation unit made of an elastic material, the button (operation unit) is used. ) Can be vibrated. In this way, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect button (button unit) itself, and it is possible to further enhance the taste of the button effect.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
The conventional game machine is provided with a first starting port, a second starting port, a first large winning opening, and a second large winning opening, and when a game ball enters the first starting port, the first symbol is variablely displayed and the first symbol is displayed. 2 When a game ball enters the starting port, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, only one of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening is opened, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened. There was a game machine that executes a big hit game in which the winning openings are opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

Further, in the conventional game machine, the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. There was a game aimed at one starting port, and in a high base state, a game was aimed at the second starting port. In addition, there is a game machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right side area of the game area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a game machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide a highly tasteful gaming property.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, it provides a highly tasteful gaming state, diversifies the transition mode of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. It provides a game machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The third starting port where the game ball can enter and
A first hit / fail determination executing means for executing a first hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port,
A second hit / fail determination execution means for executing a second hit / fail judgment executed based on the entry of the ball into the third start port, and
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. , And the game state setting means that can be set,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific result), and the first start The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second starting port and the third starting port are provided in the second gaming area.
A first game (low probability low base state) in which a game ball is launched into the first game area in the first game state and executed mainly for the first hit / fail determination, and the second game in the second game state. A second game (low accuracy and high base state) in which a game ball is launched into an area and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and a game ball is launched into the second game area in the first game state to execute the first game. 2 It is characterized by having a third game (high accuracy and low base state) that is mainly executed by a hit / fail judgment.

According to such a game machine, a first start port for executing the first hit / fail judgment is arranged in the first game area, and the first hit / fail judgment is executed in the second game area (the first state and the second state). A variable second starting port and a third starting port for executing the second hit / fail determination are arranged. Further, as the gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is low (predetermined frequency) in the first game state, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than that in the first gaming state. It has a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, the first game is launched aiming at the first start port of the first game area and executed mainly by the first hit / fail determination, and in the second game state, the second start port of the second game area is executed. The first game, which is mainly executed by aiming at and executing the first hit / fail judgment, and the second game, which is mainly executed by aiming at the third start port of the second game area in the first game state and executing the second hit / fail judgment. It has one game and.

As a result, the player can play the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and enhance the game interest by the transition mode of various game states and the new game characteristics. It will be possible. In the first game state, the frequency of ball entry into the first game area and the ball entering the first start port is higher than the frequency of ball entry into the second game area and entering the second start port. May be higher.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a third big hit and a fourth big hit.
In the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail determination is the third big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second hit / miss determination is the fourth big hit, the third game can be executed. It is characterized by the fact that.

According to such a game machine, the result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, and the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. As a result, it has a first big hit and a second big hit, and has a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the second big hit is reached, the third game can be executed. Further, in the case of the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the second big hit. Further, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the fourth big hit.

As a result, regardless of whether the first big hit or the second big hit is obtained by the first game after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing a game ball into the second game area. Further, regardless of whether the second game or the third game is performed while performing the game to be launched into the second game area, the game (second game) in which the first hit / fail judgment is performed and the second game 2 It is possible to play a game while shifting the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) for which the hit / fail judgment is performed. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2.
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state based on the execution of the first hit / fail determination a specific number of times, and the game shifts to the first game. ..

According to such a game machine, when the first hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the game shifts from the second game to the first game by executing the hit / fail determination a specific number of times. Further, in the game that executes the same first hit / fail determination, the game shifts from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

In the third game, the third game may be continued even if the second hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times. Further, in the third game, the third game may be continued until the result of the second hit / fail determination is a big hit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination, a small hit (second specific result) is obtained, and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of game profit can be obtained.
The second hit / fail determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first hit / fail determination.
In the second game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail determination is higher than that of the first game, so that the reduction speed of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game by making it possible to obtain a game profit by the small hit.

According to such a game machine, it has a small hit that can obtain a predetermined amount of game profit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment has a higher probability than the first hit / fail judgment. It is supposed to be a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of being a small hit than the first game and the second game. Further, it is assumed that the second game, which is the second game state, has a higher execution frequency of the first hit / miss determination than the first game, which is the first game state. In the second game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. As a result, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. Further, as a result, it is possible to diversify the transition mode among various gaming states having different advantages, and to enhance the gaming interest by new game characteristics. It should be noted that the result of the second hit / fail determination may be a small hit, and the result of the first hit / fail determination may be no small hit.

Further, in the second game state, the player may have a fourth game (high accuracy and high base state) in which a game ball is launched into a second game area and the first hit / fail determination is mainly executed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, in the fourth game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail judgment is higher than that in the first game, so that the reduction speed of the game medium is slower than in the first game, and the third game is a game by a small hit. By making it possible to obtain profits, the rate of decrease of the game medium may be slower than that of the second game and the fourth game. Further, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the reduction speed of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail determination is the second jackpot (corresponding to the second jackpot When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of the first embodiment are reached, the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of the first embodiment). Make the 4th game executable
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. Make the game executable
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R 7th big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the fourth big hit (Example). When the 15R 5th jackpot of 1 is reached, the 3rd game can be executed, and when the result of the 2nd hit / fail judgment is the 6th jackpot (corresponding to the 2R 6th jackpot of Example 1), the 4th game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

The "decrease rate of the game medium used for the game" is given in the same period from the game medium (fired game ball) used in a unit time (for example, 1 minute) or a unit number of shots (for example, 100 shots). The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid out prize balls) is calculated as the number of reductions in the game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is played for a predetermined period, the decrease speed of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) owned by the player is in descending order of the decrease speed. , 1st game> 2nd game (4th game)> 3rd game. In the third game, the more the game is continued, the more balls can be held by a small hit, so that the decrease speed can be said to be negative. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state of playing while reducing the number of balls held, while the third game is in a state of playing while increasing the number of balls held.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is a jackpot is more than the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, there are cases where the prize ball is obtained after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and a case where the prize ball is acquired. It is assumed that there is a case where the third game is reached after an easy jackpot game. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the first hit / fail judgment, there is no case where the prize ball goes through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. It may be possessed only when it becomes the third game after the big hit game which is easy to acquire.

Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is set to be higher than the probability of a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination can be increased. More preferably, it is desirable that the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is 1/2 or more. Further, the probability of entering the high probability state (probability of operating the probability fluctuation function) is the same in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment. On the other hand, the probability of entering state C (high probability / low base state) may be different between the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment state C (high probability / low base state) may be set. The rush probability of is higher than the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the launching game in the second game area where the third game for which the second hit / fail determination is performed can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

In addition, in the second hit / fail judgment, if the jackpot does not enter the state C (high accuracy / low base state), the jackpot is the number of prize balls that can be obtained among the jackpots (big hit game) in the second hit / fail judgment. Is the least big hit (big hit game). Further, the big hit is a big hit (big hit game) in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the smallest among the big hits (big hit game) in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by diversifying the transition mode of the gaming state.

(Reference Invention 2)
In some conventional game machines, a hit / fail judgment is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. In such a game machine, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and if the result of the hit / miss judgment is wrong, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the missed symbol. .. Further, as a symbol, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of symbols of a special symbol and an effect symbol (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional game machine are both variable display and stop display based on the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, the special symbol shows the result of the hit / fail judgment by stopping and displaying the change display without performing the game effect such as the reach variation, and the effect symbol displays the stop display by performing the game effect such as the reach variation after the variation display. This shows the result of the pass / fail judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it is possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the consistency between the two symbols due to the relationship between the display mode and the display position of the plurality of symbols. The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair game machine by facilitating confirmation of a plurality of symbols by displaying a plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A pass / fail judgment execution means that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition
The first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A second identification information display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b) that variablely displays the second identification information (effect symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A third identification information display unit (variable state indicator 49) that variablely displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in association with the variable display of the second identification information.
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result.
A first display unit (main display 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and
It is characterized by including a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

According to such a game machine, a first identification information display unit that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and a second identification information (effect symbol) are variablely displayed. It is possible to display the second identification information display unit, the third identification information display unit that displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and the game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information. It has a game effect display unit. Further, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display unit having a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. It has a department.

As a result, it is possible to confirm the second identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game effect by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the hit / miss judgment by checking the first display unit. It is possible to confirm the first identification information and the third identification information that are displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
A game machine that has a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and allows the game ball to flow down into the game area to play a game.
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

According to such a game machine, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is arranged outside (outside) the game area, and a second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. As a result, by providing a second display unit in the game area that displays the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the result of the hit / miss determination, the second display unit is provided while checking the flow of the game ball. It is possible to confirm the display mode of. In addition, the first display unit on which the first identification information and the third identification information can be confirmed is separated from the second display unit and arranged outside the game area, so that the first display unit is not confused by the game production or the like. It is possible to surely grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display unit is arranged outside the game area (the area outside the rail member that divides the game area), and the second display unit is inside the game area (the area inside the rail member that divides the game area). It may be arranged in.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2.
The first display unit is composed of LEDs, and the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals.
The second display unit is characterized in that it is larger than the first display unit.

According to such a game machine, the first display unit is composed of LEDs, the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals, and the second display unit is a display unit larger than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be simplified to ensure that the display modes of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by configuring it with liquid crystal, it is possible to execute a variety of game productions and enhance the game's interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3.
A main control unit having the hit / fail determination executing means,
It has a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control.
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are displayed by the sub control unit. It is characterized by display control.

According to such a game machine, it has a main control unit and a sub control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control. Then, among the first display units, the first identification information display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is displayed and controlled by the sub control unit. Further, the display control of the second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is performed by the sub control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control unit and the third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub control unit. As a result, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and the third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. Further, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes a control related to display control of a special symbol, a control related to a hit / fail judgment, a game related to sensor detection, a control related to ejection of a prize ball, and a control related to opening and closing of a variable ball entrance, and is a control unit that controls the game. Is. Further, the sub control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and controls the operation of the movable member and the display control of the effect display unit to control the game effect. It is a subordinate control unit of the control unit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
A game information storage means that can store predetermined game information,
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power and
Based on the detection of a decrease in the power supply voltage, the game information stored in the game information storage means can be stored for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped.
A game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the storage holding means when the power supply means starts power supply is provided.
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers faster than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

According to such a game machine, when the power supply is started, the game information recovery means for recovering the game information when the memory holding means detects a decrease in the power supply voltage based on the game information stored in the memory is provided. .. Then, when the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit possessed by the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit, and the display control can be executed. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal to diversify the game production, and it takes a certain amount of time to restore the game information because various display controls are performed. On the other hand, since the first display unit (third identification information display unit), which is simply configured with LEDs, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to recover the game information.

As a result, even if the display unit is controlled by the same sub-control unit, the third identification information display unit can be restored prior to the second display unit, and the display control can be executed as soon as possible. In addition, this makes it possible to start the game immediately after the start of power supply in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but it takes time to restore the second display unit composed of the liquid crystal (it is still restored even after the start of the game). Not). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit which has spread quickly and can start the display control.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to easily confirm a plurality of symbols and provide a fair gaming machine by displaying a plurality of symbols.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of identification information, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to the player can be executed. In this type of gaming machine, there is a game machine that gives a notice effect regarding the stop display of the identification information in a specific mode by stopping and displaying the symbol as the identification information at a specific roll (chance eye) (for example,). (Refer to JP-A-2004-33671).

However, the notice effect of stopping and displaying the symbol with a specific number has already been made known, and there is room for further improvement in order to improve the game interest.

The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize an effect of drawing the player's attention to the stop display of the identification information and to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
A gaming machine capable of performing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode.
A special stop effect executing means capable of executing a special stop effect for displaying the identification information in a predetermined special mode, and
When the special stop effect is executed, it is provided with a number-of-times suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the number-of-times suggestion effect suggesting the number of stop display times of the special aspect.
The special stop effect executing means is characterized in that it can execute the stop display of the special mode for the number of times suggested by the number of times suggestion effect.

According to such a game machine, when a special stop effect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode is executed, a number suggestion effect suggesting the number of stop display times in the special mode can be executed. The number of stop display times of the special mode suggested by the effect can be executed. As a result, when the special stop effect is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the special stop effect and the identification information are stopped and displayed in a special mode, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Become.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
The number-of-times suggestion effect is a countdown effect that counts down the number of stop display times of the special mode each time the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode.

According to such a game machine, each time the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode, the stop display count of the special mode is counted down, and the stop display count of the special mode in the special stop effect (remaining stop) (Number of impressions) is suggested. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the number of times the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the special stop effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above.
There are a plurality of special modes in the special mode.
It is possible to suggest the feasibility of the special game according to the type of the special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode.
When the stop display of the special mode is executed a plurality of times, as the number of stop display times of the special mode increases during that time, the type of the special mode to be stopped and displayed suggests that the feasibility is relatively high. It is characterized by being able to change to.

According to such a game machine, when the stop display of the special mode is executed a plurality of times in the special stop effect, the feasibility of the special game suggested by the special mode in which the stop display is displayed during that time is the possibility of the special mode. It can increase as the number of stop impressions increases. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the special game by paying the player attention to the number of times the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode and the type of the special mode in which the identification information is stopped and displayed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3 described above.
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect regarding whether or not the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after executing the stop display of the special aspect for the number of times suggested by the number of times suggestion effect is provided. It is a feature.

According to such a game machine, after the stop display of the special mode of the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion effect is executed, the specific effect regarding whether or not the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode can be executed. ing. As a result, in addition to the special stop effect, the player can pay attention to the specific effect after the special stop effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be further improved.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4 described above.
An acquired information storage means that can store acquired information acquired based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition,
A variable display means for displaying variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information is provided.
Based on the fact that specific acquired information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the special stop effect and the number of times suggestion effect can be executed.
After executing the stop display of the special aspect for the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion effect, the variable display of the identification information based on the specific acquired information is performed.

According to such a game machine, when specific acquired information is stored as the acquired information that triggers the variable display of the identification information, the special stop effect and the number of times suggestion effect can be executed. After the stop display of the special mode is executed the number of times suggested by the above, the variable display of the identification information based on the specific acquired information is performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment from the storage of the specific acquired information to the variable display of the identification information based on the specific acquired information.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 3, it is possible to realize an effect of drawing the player's attention to the stop display of the identification information and improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, the reference invention 4 for solving the same problem as the above-mentioned reference invention 3 has the following characteristic configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1
A gaming machine capable of performing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode.
A state control means that can control any of a plurality of game states,
It is provided with a stop display means capable of displaying the identification information in a predetermined special mode.
It is possible to suggest the feasibility of the special game by stopping and displaying the identification information in a special mode.
The plurality of gaming states include at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
The configuration of the special mode is different between the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the first game state and the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the second game state. Is to be.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to suggest the feasibility of the special game (in other words, the possibility that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode) by displaying the identification information in a special mode. It has become. The configuration of the special mode is different depending on whether the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the first game state or the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the second game state among the plurality of game states. It has become a thing. As a result, it is possible to make the special mode of the identification information different depending on the game state, and to draw the player's attention to the special mode according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 described above.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols.
In the first game state, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, the special mode is a mode in which a plurality of symbols all have the same classification.
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the second game state, the special mode is characterized in that a plurality of symbols are a predetermined combination of symbols.

According to such a game machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the first game state, the special mode is such that a plurality of symbols constituting the identification information are all symbols of the same classification. In the second game state, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, the special mode is such that a plurality of symbols constituting the identification information are a predetermined combination of symbols. This makes it possible to draw the player attention to the difference between the special mode in which the stop display can be displayed in the first game state and the special mode in which the stop display can be displayed in the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 described above.
In the first game state, the feasibility of the special game is suggested by the classification of the symbols constituting the special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode.
The second game state is characterized in that the feasibility of the special game is suggested by the type of one symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the special mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode. Is to be.

According to such a game machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode in the first game state, the possibility of executing the special game is suggested by the classification of the symbols constituting the special mode. ing. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the second game state, the feasibility of the special game is suggested by the type of one symbol included in the symbol combination constituting the special mode. ing. As a result, it is suggested that the special game can be executed depending on whether the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the first game state or the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second game state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to each special aspect by changing the method of.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3 described above.
Provided with an effect effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect effect when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode.
The mode of the effect effect is different between the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the first game state and the case where the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode in the second game state. It is a feature.

According to such a game machine, a predetermined effect effect can be executed when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, and the mode of the effect effect is produced in the first game state and the second game state. Is different. As a result, in addition to the special mode of the identification information, the mode of effect production also differs depending on the game state, and it becomes possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the stop display when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the special mode. ..

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 4, it is possible to realize an effect of drawing the player's attention to the stop display of the identification information, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine capable of performing a special game capable of giving a predetermined game profit to a player based on a variable display of identification information and the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. There is. In this type of gaming machine, various effects for raising the expectation of the player are performed during the variable display of the identification information (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-95470).

However, although the production content (for example, motifs and characters that appear) differs depending on the model, the production method (for example, development and pattern of the production) does not change so much in the production performed by the conventional game machine. It tends to be unified, and there is room for further improvement in order to improve the interest of games.

The present reference invention 5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize a highly tasteful production and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
It is a gaming machine that can perform a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player based on a variable display of the identification information and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
Display means that can display images and
Selective reception means that allows the player to select and display multiple types of production information and accept the selection of production information.
An effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the variable display of the identification information is provided.
When executing the specific effect, the effect executing means is characterized in that the display means displays an effect image corresponding to the type of effect information received by the selection receiving means and executes the specific effect. Is to be.

According to such a game machine, it is possible for the player to display a plurality of types of effect information in a selectable manner and accept the selection of the effect information from among them. Then, when a specific effect is executed during the variable display of the identification information that is executed after the selection of the effect information is accepted, in the specific effect, the effect image corresponding to the type of the accepted effect information is displayed. It is displayed, and an effect that reflects the result of selection by the player is developed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the taste of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the game entertainment.

The effect information refers to information indicating various elements (effect elements) constituting the effect, such as characters, items, backgrounds, and sound effects on the effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 described above.
When executing the specific effect, the effect executing means outputs the music corresponding to the type of effect information received by the selection receiving means from a predetermined output unit and executes the specific effect. Is to be.

According to such a game machine, when a specific effect is executed during the variable display of the identification information that is executed after the selection of the effect information is accepted, in the specific effect, the received effect information is displayed. In addition to displaying the production image corresponding to the type, the music corresponding to the type is output. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the taste of the specific effect when the specific effect is executed during the variable display of the identification information.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2 described above.
The variation display of the identification information is executed based on a variation pattern selected from a plurality of predetermined variation patterns.
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include at least a first fluctuation pattern and a second fluctuation pattern.
The second variation pattern is more likely to be selected than the first variation pattern when the display result of the variation display is a specific display result.
The effect executing means is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed by the variation display of the identification information based on the second variation pattern.

According to such a game machine, the variation display of the identification information is executed based on the variation pattern selected from a plurality of variation patterns including the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern. A specific effect can be executed in the variable display of the identification information based on the second variation pattern, which is likely to be selected when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to a specific effect, which can reflect the result of selection by the player, as an effect that raises expectations for the derivation of the specific display result. Become.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3 described above.
The display means includes a first display screen and a second display screen whose screen size is smaller than that of the first display screen.
The selection receiving means can display the plurality of types of effect information on the second display screen and accept the selection of the effect information.
The effect executing means is characterized in that an effect image corresponding to the type of effect information received by the selection receiving means can be displayed on the first display screen to execute the specific effect. ..

According to such a game machine, it has a first display screen and a second display screen whose screen size is smaller than that of the first display screen, and the second display screen whose screen size is relatively small is the second display screen. 2 Selection of effect information is accepted, and a specific effect reflecting the result of the selection (accepted effect information) is executed on the first display screen having a relatively large screen size. This makes it possible to emphasize the effect of the effect when a specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4 described above.
It is characterized by providing a corresponding image display means capable of displaying a corresponding image corresponding to the effect information received by the selection receiving means on a predetermined display unit.

According to such a game machine, a plurality of types of effect information are displayed in a selectable manner by the player, and when the selection of the effect information is accepted from among them, a corresponding image corresponding to the accepted effect information is predetermined. It is displayed on the display. This makes it possible to confirm which effect information has been received (selected) through the corresponding image displayed on the display unit.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 5, it is possible to realize a highly tasteful production and improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 6)
Further, the reference invention 6 for solving the same problem as the above-mentioned reference invention 5 has the following characteristic configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
It is a gaming machine that can perform a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player based on a variable display of the identification information and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
Selective reception means that allows the player to select and display multiple types of production information and accept the selection of production information.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be a specific display result.
The suggestion effect execution means is characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed in a manner corresponding to the received effect information with respect to the variable display of the identification information executed after the reception by the selection reception means. Is.

According to such a game machine, it is possible for the player to display a plurality of types of effect information in a selectable manner and accept the selection of the effect information from among them. Then, regarding the variable display of the identification information that is executed after the selection of the effect information is accepted, the suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of deriving the specific display result can be executed in the manner corresponding to the accepted effect information. ing. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a suggestion effect that reflects the result of selection by the player, and it is possible to enhance the taste of the suggestion effect.

The effect information refers to information indicating various elements (effect elements) constituting the effect, such as characters, items, backgrounds, and sound effects on the effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 described above.
The suggestion effect execution means is characterized in that, when the variable display of the identification information is executed after acceptance by the selection reception means, the suggestion effect is executed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition. Is.

According to such a game machine, regarding the variable display of the identification information that is executed after the selection of the effect information is accepted, it is predetermined that the suggestion effect is executed in the manner corresponding to the accepted effect information. This is the case when the execution condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and to enhance the interest when the suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 described above.
It is characterized in that the possibility that the execution condition is satisfied differs depending on the type of effect information received by the selection receiving means.

According to such a game machine, the possibility of establishing the execution condition of the suggestion effect differs depending on the type of the effect information for which selection is accepted from the plurality of types of effect information. As a result, the feasibility (appearance ratio) of the suggestion effect can be made different depending on the type of effect information, and the suggestion effect can be diversified.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3 described above.
It is characterized in that the possibility suggested by the suggestion effect when the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of effect information received by the selection reception means.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to derive a specific display result suggested by the suggestion effect when the suggestion effect is executed, depending on the type of effect information for which selection is accepted from a plurality of types of effect information. It's different. As a result, it is possible to make the derivation possibility of the specific display result when the suggestion effect is executed different depending on the type of the effect information, and it is possible to diversify the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4 described above.
When the suggestion effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the effect information received by the selection reception means, it is characterized by providing a notification means for notifying the fact.

According to such a game machine, when the suggestion effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the effect information for which selection is accepted from a plurality of types of effect information, that fact is notified. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the suggestion effect is executed and to draw the player's attention to the suggestion effect.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 6, it is possible to realize a highly tasteful production and improve the game entertainment.

It should be noted that any two or more of the above-mentioned reference inventions 1 to 6 may be combined.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 3A left game area (1st area), 3B right game area (2nd area), 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 8 production design, 20 1st start Mouth, 21 2nd start port, 26 3rd start port, 28 gate, 30 1st prize opening, 35 2nd prize opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd Special symbol display (second special symbol display), 71 second image display device, 71a display screen, 72 third image display device, 72a display screen, 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board ( Sub-control unit), 100 image control board (image control unit).

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player based on a variable display of the identification information and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
Selective reception means that allows the player to select and display multiple types of production information and accept the selection of production information.
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be a specific display result.
The suggestion effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed in a manner corresponding to the effect information received by the selection receiving means.

Images